JP7627147B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

For example, Patent Document 1 discloses a gaming machine that, if no V winning occurs during a small win game state, when the time-saving state ends, issues a time-saving end notification that notifies the player that the time-saving state has ended, and issues a left-hit promotion notification that encourages the player to return to left-hitting and continue playing.

JP 2018-99307 A (paragraph 0073)

In gaming machines such as that disclosed in Patent Document 1, when the gaming medium does not pass through a specific area (V winning) in a special state (small win gaming state), it is necessary to execute appropriate display control in response to changes in the gaming state.

This invention was made in consideration of the above situation, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state and executes appropriate display control when the gaming medium does not pass through a specific area.

(A) A gaming machine that executes variable display,
A variable means for controlling the game medium to enter into an enterable state;
a state control means for controlling an advantageous state advantageous to a player, a special state which is controlled after the advantageous state and in which a variable display is executed more frequently than in a normal state, and a special state which is controlled when a special condition is established in the special state and is a state different from the advantageous state, in which the variable means is controlled to the entry-enabling state;
The state control means includes:
The game medium that has entered the variable means can be controlled to the advantageous state after passing through a specific area,
After the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the special state, the game medium can be controlled to the normal state;
a display control means for displaying a display result of the variable display of the ornament identification information on the display means;
The display control means
A specific display result can be displayed on the display means as the display result in response to being controlled to the advantageous state when being controlled to the normal state,
When a power interruption occurs in the special state, and the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the special state controlled after the power interruption is restored, a special display result different from the specific display result can be displayed on the display means after the special state ends,
When the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the special state, the specific display result can be displayed on the display means after the special state ends;
When a power outage occurs and the power is restored, a restoration display can be displayed on the display means;
A power interruption occurs in the special state, and the recovery display can be terminated before the end of the special state that is controlled after the power interruption is restored,
In the normal state, any one of a plurality of types of normal background images can be displayed on the display means;
A common normal background image can be displayed on the display means in a normal state controlled after a variable display is executed in the special state without being controlled by the special state, and in the normal state controlled after the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the special state.
It is characterized by:
Other gaming machines include
A gaming machine that executes variable display,
A variable means for controlling the game medium to enter into an enterable state;
a state control means for controlling a game state into an advantageous state which is advantageous to a player, a special state which is a state different from the advantageous state and in which the variable means is controlled to the entry-enabling state, and a special state which is a game state controlled after the advantageous state and in which the variable display is executed more frequently than in a normal state;
The state control means includes:
The game medium that has entered the variable means can be controlled to the advantageous state when the game medium passes through a specific area,
When the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the special state in a case where the game medium is controlled to the special state, the game medium can be controlled to the normal state;
a display control means for displaying a display result of the variable display of the ornament identification information on the display means;
The display control means
A specific display result can be displayed on the display means as the display result in response to being controlled to the advantageous state when being controlled to the normal state,
When the vehicle is controlled to the special state, a special display result different from the specific display result can be displayed on the display means as the display result in response to the vehicle being controlled to the special state,
When the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the special state in a case where the game medium is controlled to be in the special state, the specific display result can be displayed on the display means in the normal state after the special state;
When the variable display is executed and the special state is controlled to the normal state without being controlled to the special state, game value information regarding the game value given to the player can be displayed on the display means.
It is characterized by:
Other gaming machines include
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that executes variable display (variable display),
A variable means (V-judgment winning device 87) that controls the game medium (game ball) to enter into an entry-enabling state;
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120) capable of controlling the performance;
A game control means (CPU 103) capable of transmitting information (performance control commands) relating to the progress of a game to the performance control means;
a state control means (CPU 103) capable of controlling a favorable state (big win game state) favorable to a player, a special state (small win game state) which is a state different from the favorable state and in which the variable means is controlled to the entry-enabling state, and a special state (time-saving state) which is a game state controlled after the favorable state and in which the variable display is executed more frequently than in a normal state;
Equipped with
The state control means includes:
When the game medium that has entered the variable means passes through a specific area (V winning area 870), it can be controlled to the advantageous state,
When a predetermined number of variable displays are executed without being controlled to the advantageous state based on the variable display executed in the special state, the special state can be controlled to the normal state (when seven variable displays are executed without the occurrence of either a "jackpot" or a "jackpot via a small jackpot" in the [rush mode] of the time-saving state, the time-saving state can be controlled to the normal state);
The information includes start information (variable pattern command) that can specify the start of the variable display, and end information (pattern determination command) that can specify the end of the variable display,
The end information includes first end information (a symbol determination B designation command) that is transmitted when the variable display for a predetermined number of times is a variable display that is not controlled to the advantageous state, and second end information (a symbol determination A designation command) that is transmitted when the variable display for a number of times different from the predetermined number of times is a variable display that is not controlled to the advantageous state,
The performance control means includes:
It is possible to execute a notification effect (a result effect that displays a result display) that notifies the player of the acquired game value,
When the first end information is received based on the fact that the variable display for the predetermined number of times in the special state is a variable display that is not controlled to the advantageous state, the notification performance can be executed (a result display is displayed based on the fact that a symbol determination B designation command is received).
When the special state is entered in a predetermined number of variable displays in the special state and the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the special state, the notification effect can be executed when the start information corresponding to the variable display that is started after the special state is received (when the seventh variable display is executed in the [rush mode] of the time-saving state, the display result becomes a "small win" and, when a V is not won during the small win game, a result display is displayed based on the reception of a variable pattern designation command corresponding to the next variable display).
It is characterized by:
According to such a feature, when the next variable display is executed in the case where the gaming medium does not pass through the specific area in the special state, the gaming value information can be displayed at an appropriate timing.

The present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, or may have the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention as well as configurations other than the invention-specific matters.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. A front view of the pachinko game machine 1 at characteristic portion 152F. FIG. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. An explanatory diagram showing a hit determination table and a jackpot type determination table. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of a performance control command. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of a performance control command. 13 is a flowchart showing the start port switch passing process. 13 is a flowchart showing normal processing of special symbols. This is a flowchart showing the processing before the small win is released. This is a flowchart showing the processing during small win release. This is a flowchart showing the small hit end processing. A front view of the pachinko game machine 1 at characteristic portion 09TM. An explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type table. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. (A1) and (A2) are explanatory diagrams showing the display result determination table, (B1) and (B2-1) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table, and (B2-2) is an explanatory diagram showing the jackpot type determination table via small jackpot. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table for the 1st to 99th spins of the Hyper Rush mode time reduction, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table for the 1st to 4th spins of the Hyper Rush mode remaining reserve. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a game flow. 10 is a time chart showing control timing of a game state relating to a first flag, a second flag, and a third flag. This is a time chart showing the control timing of the game state regarding small hit breaks. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a process for determining a performance at the start of fluctuation. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a combination determination table for a jackpot of decorative symbols. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of the presentation aspects relating to the pattern stopping action presentation and the pattern stopping sound presentation. This is a flowchart showing an example of a process for determining the performance during a small win. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a presentation mode table for promotional presentations. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation aspect related to the first promotion presentation. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation aspect related to the second promotion presentation. A flowchart showing an example of a process for determining the presentation at the end of a small win. 11 is a time chart showing an example of the display control timing of the result display. 11 is a time chart showing an example of the display control timing of the result display. 13 is a time chart showing a modified example of the display control timing of the result display. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a demo display performance determination process. 1A is an explanatory diagram showing an execution condition table for a customer waiting demo effect, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram showing an execution period determination table for a recovery notification effect. This is a time chart showing the timing of execution of the effects when a V win occurs and when a small win break occurs. This is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of the presentation when a V win occurs and when a small win break occurs. This is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of the presentation when a V win occurs and when a small win break occurs. This is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of the presentation when a V win occurs and when a small win break occurs. This is a time chart showing the timing of the execution of effects when a power outage occurs during small hit play and when a small hit interruption occurs after power is restored. This is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of presentation patterns when a power outage occurs during a small hit game and when a small hit interruption occurs after power is restored. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a modified example of the game flow.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and game balls as game media are shot into this game area by a predetermined ball shooting device.

At a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, to the right of the play area), a first special pattern display device 4A and a second special pattern display device 4B are provided that perform a variable display (also called a special pattern game) of special patterns (also called special patterns) as multiple types of special identification information. Each of these is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special patterns are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The special patterns may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

Note that the "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, a variable display of multiple types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described below). Variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative symbols described below, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that variations also include a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described below). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or variation.

The special pattern variably displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A is also called the "first special pattern," and the special pattern variably displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B is also called the "second special pattern." A special pattern game using the first special pattern is also called the "first special pattern game," and a special pattern game using the second special pattern is also called the "second special pattern game." There may be only one type of special pattern display device that variably displays the special patterns.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) device, and displays various presentation images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various presentation images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, multiple types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) that are different from the special patterns are variably displayed as decorative identification information. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. The special game and the variable display of decorative patterns that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

The screen of the image display device 5 may be provided with a display area for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display that is being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display-compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of reserved variable displays is also called the reserved memory number. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also called the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also called the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also called the total reserved memory number.

In addition, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each of which includes a plurality of LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs, and the second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning hole that is always kept in a constant open state so that game balls can enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) forms a second start winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by the solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B is, for example, an electric tulip-type device having a pair of movable wings, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wings are in a vertical position, so that the tip of the movable wings approaches the winning ball device 6A, and the second start winning hole is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable wings of the variable winning ball device 6B are in a tilted position, so that the second start winning hole is in an open state in which the game ball can enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the second special game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to devices that include an electric tulip-type device.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions are provided at the lower left and right of the game area), general winning openings 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 2), and the large winning opening door forms the large winning opening as a specific area that can be switched between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (for the special electric device) is in the OFF state, the large prize opening door closes the large prize opening, and game balls cannot enter (pass through) the large prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is in the ON state, the large prize opening door opens the large prize opening, and game balls can easily enter the large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 14 balls) are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each winning port, including the general winning port 10, is also called a "winning". In particular, a winning ball into a starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) is also called a starting winning port.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (to the left of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbols may also include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

A pass gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided to the left of the image display device 5. When the game ball passes through the pass gate 41, a regular game is executed.

A normal symbol pending display 25C is provided above the normal symbol display 20. The normal symbol pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal symbol pending memory count, which is the number of normal symbol games that are pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L and 8R for playing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and gaming effect lamps 9 for gaming effects are provided around the periphery of the gaming area. The gaming effect lamps 9 are composed of LEDs.

A movable body 32 that moves according to the performance is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (not shown in Figure 1).

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided, which is operated by the player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or gaming balls loaned from a predetermined ball loaning machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. Below the upper tray, a ball supply tray (lower tray) is provided from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. Operations on the stick controller 31A are detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a push button 31B is provided that the player can press to give a predetermined command. The operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

(Outline of game progress)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player rotating the ball hitting operation handle 30 provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on the passing cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on the passing is put on hold up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal winning". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal losing". When a "normal winning" occurs, an opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B in an open state for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special game is started by the second special pattern display device 4B.

In addition, if the game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when the special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to a big win game state or a small win game state (when a start winning occurs but the special game based on the start winning cannot be played immediately), the special game based on that entry will be put on hold until a specified upper limit number (for example, 4).

In special game, if a specific special symbol (a big win symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol varies depending on the type of big win, as described below) is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is a "big win", and if a specific special symbol different from the big win symbol (a small win symbol, for example, "2") is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is a "small win". Also, if a special symbol different from the big win or small win symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is a "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game state is controlled to a big win game state, which is advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "small win", the game state is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can get prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The more rounds there are in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the upper limit opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

For example, there are multiple types of opening modes of the big prize entrance (number of rounds and maximum opening period) and game states after the big prize game state (normal state, time-saving state, probability change state, etc., described later), and the big prize type is set according to these.
As the types of jackpots, there may be provided jackpot types in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and jackpot types in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained.

In the small win game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening state. For example, in the small win game state, the large prize opening is opened in the same opening state as the large prize opening in the large prize game state for some large prize types (the number of times the large prize opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the timing of closing the large prize opening is also the same, etc.). Note that, like the large prize types, small prize types may also be set for "small wins".

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (period during which the special symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state and by improving the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in the regular symbol game more than in the normal state. The time-saving state is an advantageous state for the player because it is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

In the probability variable state (probability fluctuating state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is executed, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for the player, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuation, but also makes it easier to get a "jackpot."

The time-saving state or the probability of a special bonus state will continue until one of the end conditions is met first, such as the specified number of special games being played or the start of the next big win game state. The end condition of the state in which the specified number of special games have been played is also called a count-cut (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability of a special bonus state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a game state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability-varying state, and is a state in which the pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified return process is not executed after the power is turned on).

The state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. The high probability state and low base state are also called a high probability low base state.

After the small win game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special game becomes "small win" is continued (however, if the special game when the "small win" occurs is the special game of the specified number of times in the number cut, the game state will naturally change). Note that the display result of the special game does not have to be "small win".

The game state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (e.g., a specific area within a big prize opening) during a big win game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game state may be controlled to a special probability state after the big win game state.

(Progression of the Presentation, etc.) In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various presentations (presentations to inform the progress of the game or to liven up the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The presentations are described below. The presentations are executed by displaying various presentation images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, the presentations may be executed by sound output from the speakers 8L, 8R, and/or by turning on/off the game effect lamp 9, operating the movable body 32, etc.

As an effect that is executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative patterns begins in response to the start of the first or second special pattern game. At the timing when the display result (also called the determined special pattern) in the first or second special pattern game is displayed statically, the determined decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is also displayed statically (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts to when it ends, the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, which will be described later.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach state occurs during the variable display of the decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple types of reach effects are executed, which have different rates of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also called the jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation rate) depending on the performance state. Reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative patterns (for example, "7") are displayed stopped in line on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" that is controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, odd decorative symbols (e.g., "7") may be displayed in a line, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (normal jackpot)" that is not controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, even decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed in a line. In this case, odd decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and even decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (normal symbols). After a reach state is reached with non-probability jackpot symbols, a promotion effect may be executed that ultimately results in a "probability jackpot".

When the display result of the special game is a "small win", a fixed decorative pattern (such as "1 3 5") that is a predetermined small win combination is derived on the screen of the image display device 5 as a display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a "small win"). As an example, decorative patterns that constitute chance eyes are displayed stationary on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Note that a common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed when the display result of the special game is a "big win" of some big win types (big win types in a big win game state that are the same as a small win game state) and when it is a "small win".

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") as a "non-reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination as a "reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Preview effects include a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently being executed, and a look-ahead preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is on hold). As a look-ahead preview effect, an effect that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, a pseudo consecutive performance may be executed in which a single variable display appears to be multiple variable displays by temporarily pausing the decorative pattern during the variable display and then restarting the variable display.

During a big win game state, a big win performance is executed to notify the player of the big win game state. As a big win performance, a performance to notify the number of rounds or a promotion performance to indicate that the value of the big win game state will increase may be executed. Also, during a small win game state, a small win performance to notify the player of the small win game state is executed. In addition, a common performance may be executed during a small win game state and a big win game state for some big win types (a big win type of a big win game state in the same manner as a small win game state, for example, a big win type in which the game state after that is a high probability state), so that the player cannot know whether he is currently in a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, a common performance may be executed after the end of the small win game state and after the end of the big win game state, so that it is not possible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state.

In addition, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo performance is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in Fig. 2. In addition, various boards, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, a power supply board, etc., are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1.

The main board 11 is the main control board, and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of the special game (including management of reserved balls), execution of the regular game (including management of reserved balls), big win game state, small win game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes the programs stored in the ROM 101 to perform processes that control the progress of the game (processes that realize the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as data on fluctuation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the programs stored in the ROM 101 may be deployed to the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the first special pattern display device 4A, the second special pattern display device 4B, the normal pattern display device 20, the first hold display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, the normal hold display device 25C, etc., solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23), and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 and solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

As part of controlling the progress of the game, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 in accordance with the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. The presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various determination results in the main board 11 (for example, the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable pattern used when executing the special game (described in detail later)), the game status (for example, the start or end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot opening, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notifying errors, and notifying of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes the programs stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The presentation control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute a presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the content of the operation).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the performance based on instructions to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays a performance image on the image display unit 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display unit 5 based on an instruction to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal designating the on/off state of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal to operate the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or to a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the turning on and off of the lamp.

The performance control CPU 120 may be configured to execute control of audio output, turning on/off the lamp (such as supplying a sound designation signal or a lamp signal), and controlling the movable body 32 (such as supplying a signal to operate the movable body 32).

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for performance) used to execute various performances. The random numbers for performance may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

The boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with the pachinko game machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

(Operation)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main Operations of Main Board 11)
First, a description will be given of the main operations of the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and a game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. Fig. 3 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Then, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and setting the RAM 102 to be accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on or not (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on with the clear switch in the on state, the output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), an initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 executes a RAM clear process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the working area.

The CPU 103 also transmits a presentation control command to the presentation control board 12 to instruct initialization (step S9). When the presentation control CPU 120 receives the presentation control command, it displays a screen on the image display device 5, for example, to notify the user that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power outage or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes a power supply stop processing immediately before the machine becomes unable to operate due to the power supply being stopped. In this power supply stop processing, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process for the RAM 102, etc. are executed. The data protection process includes the addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The backed up data includes various data for progressing the game (including various flags, the status of various timers, etc.), as well as the status of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. If the backup flag is off and no backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), CPU 103 performs a data check of the backed up data (using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, a parity bit or a checksum is used to determine whether the data in RAM 102 matches the data at the time the power supply was stopped. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be restored to the state it was in when the power supply was stopped, so an initialization process (step S8) is performed.

If it is determined that the data in RAM 102 is normal (Step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (Step S6) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state it was in when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets a working area based on the memory contents of RAM 102 (contents of the backed-up data). This restores the game state to the state it was in when the power supply was stopped, and if the special symbols were changing, the game control timer interrupt process described below is executed to resume the change of the special symbols from the state before the recovery.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a presentation control command to the presentation control board 12 to instruct recovery from the power outage (step S7). In conjunction with this, a presentation control command specifying the backed-up game state before the power outage, or, if a special symbol game was being played, a presentation control command specifying the display result of the special symbol game being played may be transmitted. These commands can be the same as the commands transmitted and set in the special symbol process processing described below. When the presentation control CPU 120 receives a presentation control command specifying the time of recovery from the power outage, it displays a screen on the image display device 5, for example, to notify the user that recovery from the power outage has been achieved or that recovery from the power outage is in progress. The presentation control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the presentation control command.

After completing the recovery or initialization process and sending a performance control command to the performance control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12). After that, a loop process is entered. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

After executing such game control main processing, the CPU 103 receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, and then executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. 4. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch processing to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After this, by executing a predetermined information output processing, data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start winnings), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability fluctuation state has occurred) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1 is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process is executed to update at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, the execution and reservation management of the special symbol game, the control of the big win game state and the small win game state, the control of the game state, etc. are realized (described in detail later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, enabling the execution and reservation management of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), and the opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol hit". The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting the normal symbol reservation display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. Then, the CPU 103 executes a command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a performance control command for transmission in each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, a process is performed to transmit the performance control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the performance control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Figure 5 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S25 shown in Figure 4. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning judgment process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a start winning, store the reserved information in a specified area of the RAM 102, and update the reserved memory number. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of big win) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as reserved information. In addition, a process for predicting and judging the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value may be executed. After the reserved information and the reserved memory number are stored, a transmission setting is performed to transmit a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of a start winning, the reserved memory number, and the predictive judgment. The performance control command at the time of the start winning that has been transmitted and set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S120), a transmission setting is made to transmit a performance control command corresponding to each step to the performance control board 12.

The normal special pattern processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal special pattern processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game based on the presence or absence of reserved information. In addition, in the normal special pattern processing, based on a random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is to be a "big win" or a "small win", and if it is a "big win", the type of big win is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the normal special pattern processing, a determined special pattern (either a big win pattern, a small win pattern, or a losing pattern) to be stopped and displayed in the special pattern game is set in response to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "1", and the normal special pattern processing is terminated. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed in preference to the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also called special pattern 2 priority consumption). In addition, the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also known as winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which decision values compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining the fluctuation pattern to one of multiple types using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a pre-determined result of whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2" and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (special game variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special pattern change process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "2". This special pattern change process includes a process for making settings to change the special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, and a process for measuring the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special pattern change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change reaches the special pattern change time, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "3", and the special pattern change process ends.

The special pattern stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "3". This special pattern stop process includes a process for setting the first special pattern display device 4A or the second special pattern display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special pattern and to stop displaying (deriving) the confirmed special pattern that is the display result of the special pattern. If the display result is a "big win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, if the big win flag is off and the display result is a "small win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is a "miss", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "0". If the display result is a "small win" or "miss", when the time-saving state or the probability of winning is controlled and the end of the number of times is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special pattern process flag is updated, the special pattern stop process ends.

The pre-opening process for the jackpot in step S114 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "4". This pre-opening process for the jackpot includes a process for setting the jackpot opening port to open by starting the execution of a round in the jackpot game state based on the display result being "jackpot". When the jackpot opening port is opened, a process for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening port is executed. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the maximum open period for the jackpot opening port and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5" and the pre-opening process for the jackpot is completed.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the jackpot opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the jackpot opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the jackpot opening is to be returned to a closed state, a process for stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door is executed, and then the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6", and the jackpot opening process is terminated.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "6". This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the big prize opening has been executed has reached a set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. When the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", whereas when the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special chart process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation is executed as a presentation operation that notifies the end of the jackpot game state has elapsed, and a process of making various settings for starting special rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small win pre-opening process in step S118 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "8". This small win pre-opening process includes a process for setting the large prize opening to an open state in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "9", and the small win pre-opening process ends.

The small win open processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "9". This small win open processing includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the large prize opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the large prize opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time. When the large prize opening is returned to a closed state and it is time to end the small win game state, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "10" and the small win open processing ends.

The small win end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "10". This small win end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which the presentation operation that notifies the end of the small win game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small win game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before the small win game state is entered is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small win game state has elapsed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the small win end process ends.

(Main operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be described. When the performance control board 12 receives a power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of Fig. 6. When the performance control main process shown in Fig. 6 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12. In addition, it executes an initial operation control process (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return it to its initial position and control to perform a predetermined operation check.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on or not (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example based on the register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the system waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, an interrupt occurs to receive a performance control command from the main board 11, in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 becomes ON. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be prohibited, but if a CPU that does not automatically become interrupt prohibited is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt prohibition command (DI command). In response to an interrupt due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, among the input ports included in the I/O 125. The performance control command taken in at this time is stored in a performance control command reception buffer provided in, for example, the RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then sets the interrupt to permitted and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various presentation control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the presentation control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read presentation control commands are performed. For example, the read presentation control command is stored in a specified area of the RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on so that which presentation control command was received and the contents specified by the presentation control command can be confirmed in the presentation control process process, etc. In addition, if the presentation control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process, for example, control is performed to operate various performance devices, such as the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of the movable body 32. In addition, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are made regarding the control contents of the performance operations using the various performance devices in accordance with the performance control commands, etc. transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing of step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Before returning to step S73, other processes may be executed.

Figure 7 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of Figure 6 as the performance control process processing. In the performance control process processing shown in Figure 7, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a look-ahead preview setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead preview setting process, for example, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing a look-ahead preview performance are made based on the performance control command at the time of the start winning transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, processing is executed to display a hold display based on the number of hold memories identified from the performance control command.

After executing the processing of step S161, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processing of steps S170 to S177 as described below, depending on the value of a performance process flag provided in, for example, RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable body 32, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. After performing such performance control, for example, in response to the reading of an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or the reception of a command specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern from the main board 11, the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3" and the performance process during variable display ends.

The special winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "3". In this special winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not a performance control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a performance control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state is received, if the command specifies the start of a big win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "6". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. In addition, when a command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special game was "miss", and the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0". Once the value of the performance process flag is updated, the special drawing hit waiting process ends.

The small win presentation process of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the presentation control process flag is "4". In this small win presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets, for example, a presentation control pattern corresponding to the presentation content in the small win game state, and executes various presentation controls in the small win game state based on the set content. In addition, in the small win presentation process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the small win game state is to be ended, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the small win end presentation, and the small win presentation process is ended.

The small win end presentation process in step S175 is executed when the value of the presentation control process flag is "5". In this small win end presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a small win game state, and executes various presentation controls at the end of the small win game state based on the settings. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small win end presentation process ends.

The jackpot performance process of step S176 is executed when the performance process flag value is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot gaming state is to end, the value of the performance control process flag is updated to "7", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process is ended.

The ending presentation process of step S177 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "7". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the settings. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Modification of the basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes when a prize is won, but it may also be an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points when a prize is won.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol showing "- ") may be displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be achieved by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the pattern. Furthermore, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the display result may not include the symbol showing "- ").

In the above basic explanation, a pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as the gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to slot machines (e.g., slot machines equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.)) that can play a game in which medals are inserted and a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a specific combination of symbols is formed, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player.

The programs and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to being distributed or provided to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, but may be distributed by being pre-installed in a storage device of the computer device or the like. Furthermore, the programs and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory, or by directly executing the game using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions of comparison of various percentages such as the execution percentage of effects (such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) may include one being a "0%" percentage. For example, this also includes one being a "0%" percentage and the other being a "100%" percentage or a percentage less than "100%".

(Description of Characteristic Part 152F)
Next, the characteristic part 152F of this embodiment will be described. Regarding the characteristic part 152F, a technology targeted at a pachinko game machine capable of setting a setting value with different advantageous degrees for a player, such as a winning probability of a jackpot, by a setting means will be described as follows. The game control microcomputer 100 (CPU 103) also functions as a setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values with different advantageous degrees for a player as a setting value for the winning probability of a jackpot.

First, let us explain the setting values. The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in this example is configured so that the probability of winning a jackpot can be changed according to the setting values by someone at the gaming facility (such as a gaming facility staff member) using a specified switch or other operating means to change the settings.

For example, in the game control microcomputer 100 (CPU 103), a setting change process is executed that allows the probability of winning a jackpot set in the pachinko game machine 1 to be changed in response to a setting change operation. As a result, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, a setting change process is executed that allows the probability of winning a jackpot to be changed by using a display result judgment table according to the setting value. The setting value consists of six levels (multiple levels) from 1 to 6, for example, and the probability of winning a jackpot increases in the order of setting value 1 < setting value 2 < setting value 3 < setting value 4 < setting value 5 < setting value 6. In other words, when setting value 1 is set as the setting value, the player has the lowest advantage, and the advantage increases stepwise in the order of setting value 2 < setting value 3 < setting value 4 < setting value 5 < setting value 6. Note that the setting value may be set in multiple levels and is not limited to six levels. In this way, by making it possible to change the probability of winning a jackpot, the payout rate (number of balls paid per unit time (number of winning balls)) changes, so changing the setting value can also be said to change the payout rate.

For example, in the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment, the probability of winning a jackpot changes depending on the setting value selected by the setting change operation when the power is turned on. Of the six setting values, for example, setting values 4 to 6 may be called high settings, which have a high probability of winning a jackpot, and setting values 1 to 3, for example, may be called low settings, which have a low probability of winning a jackpot.

The probability of selecting a type of jackpot may also be changeable by setting values 1 to 6, just like the probability of winning a jackpot. The probability of selecting a variation pattern type may also be changeable by setting values 1 to 6, just like the probability of winning a jackpot. The probability of selecting a variation pattern may also be changeable by setting values 1 to 6, just like the probability of winning a jackpot.

Regarding the characteristic section 152F, in a pachinko game machine that can set any one of a plurality of set values, when the machine is controlled to a jackpot game state, a reserved consecutive win may be executed in which reserved information determined to be controlled to a win (jackpot or small win) is stored in the RAM 122 as a reserved memory buffer. Specifically, a reserved consecutive win refers to a consecutive win (reserved consecutive wins) within a reserved information range in which there is reserved information that will be a win in the future among the reserved information that exists when a jackpot occurs, and the next win occurs consecutively within the reserved information that existed at the time of the jackpot occurrence after the jackpot game state ends. In addition, in the case of a small win, a jackpot via a small win is generated based on the occurrence of a V prize, so the reserved information of the small win can be said to be reserved memory information of a win that will be a jackpot in the future. When such a reserved consecutive win is executed, a notification effect that notifies the player that the reserved consecutive win is a reserved consecutive win may be executed.

Figure 8-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 152F. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 152F, the reference symbols and explanations for the same configuration as in the front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in Figure 1 are omitted, and only the different parts are explained.

In the game area where the game balls can flow down after being thrown, a first path of the game balls' flow paths is provided mainly in the area to the left of the image display device 5 when viewed from the front, and a second path of the game balls' flow paths, which is different from the first path, is provided mainly in the area to the right of the image display device 5 when viewed from the front.

Hitting a game ball into the left area (left game area) of the image display device 5 to make the game ball flow down the first path is called a left hit. Hitting a game ball into the right area (right game area) of the image display device 5 to make the game ball flow down the second path is called a right hit. The first path is a path that allows the game ball to flow down by hitting the game ball into the left side of the game area, so it may be called the left hit path. Also, the second path is a path that allows the game ball to flow down by hitting the game ball into the right side of the game area, so it may be called the right hit path.

The first path and the second path may be separate paths, or may be paths that are partially shared. The left and right play areas may be separated, for example, by the end face of the image display device 5 or the arrangement of the play nails within the play area.

When a game ball is launched from the ball launching device in response to the operation of the ball operating handle 30 and hit into the game area, if it is guided to the left game area, it will be guided, for example, along the arrangement of the game nails, making it impossible or difficult to guide it to the right game area. Also, when a game ball is guided to the right game area, it will be guided, for example, along the arrangement of the game nails, making it impossible or difficult to guide it to the left game area.

A winning ball device 6A with a first start winning hole is provided as a structure into which a game ball hit into the left game area of the game area can enter. The winning ball device 6A is disposed below the image display device 5. The winning ball device 6A is provided with a first start winning hole switch 22A for detecting a game ball that has entered the first start winning hole.

The passing gate 41, the variable winning ball device 6B, and the V-determination winning device 87 are provided as structures through which game balls that have been hit into the right playing area of the playing area can enter. The variable winning ball device 6B has a second start winning port through which game balls can enter. In addition, as switches for detecting game balls that have entered each port, a gate switch 21 is provided inside the passing gate 41, a second start winning port switch 22B is provided inside the second start winning port, and a V-winning switch 87a, a V-determination winning switch 15a, and a V-determination discharge switch 15b are provided inside the V-determination winning device 87.

In the left play area, game nails are planted so that the game ball is guided to the first start winning hole of the winning hole structure. Therefore, when aiming to make the game ball enter the first start winning hole, the player only needs to hit the game ball to the left. Also, in the right play area, game nails are planted so that the game ball is guided to the second start winning hole and the passing gate 41 of the winning hole structure. Therefore, when aiming to make the game ball enter the second start winning hole and the passing gate 41, the player only needs to hit the game ball to the right.

The passing gate 41 is a gate structure through which the game ball can enter (pass). When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol changes and is displayed. The normal symbol will be described later. In the left game area, the game nails are planted so that the game ball is guided to the first start winning hole of the winning hole structure. Therefore, when aiming to have the game ball enter the first start winning hole, the player only needs to hit the game ball to the left. In the right game area, the game nails are planted so that the game ball is guided to the second start winning hole of the winning hole structure and the passing gate 41. Therefore, when aiming to have the game ball enter the second start winning hole and the passing gate 41, the player only needs to hit the game ball to the right.

The V-judging winning device 87 is a device for judging the V-winning of the game ball, which is a condition for generating a big win when a small win occurs.

The V-judgment winning device 87 is made of a transparent material, and the game ball passing through the inside can be seen. The V-judgment winning device 87 has a width in the front and back directions at the top that allows the game ball to pass through, and walls are provided on both sides (the front and back sides) of a passage that slopes from right to left and extends in the left and right directions, and a guide path along which the game ball is guided is formed. In the center of the guide path, an operating port is formed as an opening that can allow a total of about 10 or more game balls to enter during the specified open period by repeatedly opening and closing for a specified period (for example, 0.1 seconds x 10 opening periods + 1 second closing period (interval period) x 9 times + 1 second end period) when a small win occurs. In the passage of the game ball in the V-determination winning device 87, multiple protrusions are provided alternately on both sides of the wall as deceleration means for decelerating the game ball being guided, forming a structure (hereinafter referred to as a deceleration structure) in which the game ball flows slowly in the passage above the operating port at the top of the V-determination winning device 87 when hit from the right.

In the small win game state, the opening control of the V-determination winning device 87 is executed for a relatively long period of time until the entry of 10 game balls into the V-determination winning device 87 is detected or until a predetermined period of time has elapsed. In the V-determination winning device 87, the portion of the induction path where the operating port is not formed forms a fixed passage called the fixed portion 873. At a position where the operating port can be opened and closed, a movable portion 872 that can move forward and backward on the operating port is provided.

The movable part 872 is driven by the solenoid 22 and can move back and forth to open and close the operating port. When the operating port is closed due to the state of the movable part 872, the game ball can pass through the upper surfaces of the movable part 872 and the fixed part 873 as a guide path, and is guided along the guide path from the right end to the left end and falls from the left end. When the operating port is open due to the operating state of the movable part 872, the operating port opens on the guide path, so that the game ball guided along the guide path can fall from the operating port into the inside of the V-determination winning device 87.

Inside the V-determination winning device 87 (operating port), a specific V winning area 870 is provided in the center of the left-right direction at the bottom of the V-determination winning device 87 as a winning area where game balls entering from the operating port can win, and further, a ramp is provided that guides all game balls that enter from the operating port onto the V winning area 870 via an inclined path. The V winning area 870 has a V winning port through which game balls can enter, and is capable of guiding game balls that enter from the V winning port downward.

At the top of the winning opening (V winning opening) of the V winning area 870, a plate-like opening/closing member (not shown) is provided that can switch the V winning area 870 to either an open state or a closed state. The opening/closing member is driven by a solenoid 22 and can move forward and backward to open and close the V winning opening. When the opening/closing member is in the open state, the game ball guided onto the V winning area 870 is able to fall into the V winning area 870. On the other hand, when the opening/closing member is in the closed state, the game ball guided onto the V winning area 870 passes over the opening/closing member and is set up in a manner that opens near the downstream side of the V winning area 870, and is able to fall into the winning ball area (not shown) that can guide the game downward.

Specifically, the V winning area 870 of the V-determination winning device 87 is basically in an open state, and in a small win game state in which the operating port of the V-determination winning device 87 is open, when one game ball enters the V winning area 870 and wins, the game ball is detected by the V winning switch 87a provided in the V winning area 870. In a small win game state, when one game ball is detected by the V winning switch 87a, the opening and closing member is controlled to a closed state, and the game ball guided onto the V winning area 870 thereafter enters the winning ball area. The game ball that enters the winning ball area is detected by the V-determination winning switch 15a provided in the winning ball area.
As a result, of the game balls that enter the V-judgment winning device 87, one game ball is detected by the V-judgment winning switch 87a, and the subsequent game balls are detected by the V-judgment winning switch 15a.

When the total number of balls detected by the V-winning switch 87a and the V-judgment winning switch 15a reaches 10, the V-judgment winning device 87, which is opened during a small win game state, closes its operating port and is placed in a state where game balls cannot enter. The V-winning area 870 and the winning ball area are configured to merge below, and game balls that enter the V-judgment winning device 87 through the merged discharge passage are discharged to a specified discharge path inside the game board 2. The discharge passage is provided with a V-judgment discharge switch 15b that can detect discharged game balls, and all discharged game balls are detected by this switch.

When a small win occurs and the operating port of the V-judgment winning device 87 is opened, if a game ball enters the V-winning area 870 and is detected by the V-winning switch 87a during a specified valid period, the conditions for a big win are met and the game is controlled to a big win game state. Such a game ball entering the V-winning area 870 is called a V-winning. In the pachinko game machine 1, as described above, during the period when a small win occurs and the operating port of the V-judgment winning device 87 is opened, the structure and control are designed so that an average of about 10 game balls in total can enter the V-judgment winning device 87 without requiring any special operation, and further, the structure is designed so that when a game ball can enter the V-judgment winning device 87, the game ball always (100%) enters the V-winning area 870. In addition, in the pachinko game machine 1, when a small win occurs, a right-hit promotion notification is executed to instruct the player to hit to the right so that the player can easily hit the game ball into the V-determination winning device 87.

Therefore, when a small win occurs, unless the player does not shoot the game ball while the operating port of the V-determination winning device 87 is open, or the player hits with the left hand, if the player hits with the right hand, the game ball will always (100%) enter the V winning area 870 and a big win will occur.

In this embodiment, an example is shown in which a deceleration structure for the game ball is provided in the V-determination winning device 87. However, instead of providing such a deceleration structure, an operating port that allows the game ball to fall into a part of the guide path for the game ball in the V-determination winning device 87 may be provided, and the operating port may be opened 10 times to allow about 10 game balls to enter the V-winning area 870 during the small win game state.

In the right play area, game nails are planted so that the game ball is guided to the variable winning ball device 6B and the V-determination winning device 87. Therefore, when aiming to make the game ball enter the variable winning ball device 6B and the V-determination winning device 87, the player only needs to hit the game ball to the right.

It is also possible for a game ball hit into the left game area to have the potential to enter either the variable winning ball device 6B or the V-determined winning ball device 87, but from the standpoint of gameplay, it is desirable to make this possibility extremely low compared to the possibility of a game ball hit into the right game area entering either of them.

A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the play area. In the special variable winning ball device 7, game balls hit to the right are guided by game nails planted in the right play area. In addition, the special variable winning ball device 7 is configured so that game balls cannot enter from the left play area, depending on the state in which the game nails are planted.

The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening covered by a rectangular door on the front, and when a big win occurs, a solenoid causes the door to tilt forward around the base, revealing (opening) the large winning opening. A count switch 23 for detecting the game ball that has entered is provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7. The winning route to the special variable winning ball device 7 is restricted by game nails and other structures so that the game ball can enter the large winning opening only when the game ball is shot into the right game area. It is also possible to make it possible for the game ball to enter the large winning opening regardless of whether it is shot into the left game area or the right game area.

A jackpot occurs when a jackpot pattern (jackpot display result) is derived and displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A, and when a jackpot pattern (jackpot display result) is derived and displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B. When a jackpot is determined by lottery based on a game ball entering the first start winning slot, a jackpot pattern is derived and displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A. When a jackpot is determined by lottery based on a game ball entering the second start winning slot, a jackpot pattern is derived and displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B.

A big win also occurs when a game ball that entered when the operating port of the V-determined winning device 87 is open due to a small win game state enters the V-winning area 870. Hereinafter, a game ball entering the V-winning area 870 and being detected by the V-winning switch 87a is called a V-winning. A small win is a win in which the operating port of the V-determined winning device 87 opens as a predetermined value, and a big win can occur on the condition of V-winning. In the V-determined winning device 87, a game state in which the operating port opens is called a "small win game state." And, a big win that occurs based on a game ball entering the V in a small win game state is called a "big win via a small win."
In contrast, a jackpot game state that is reached based on the display result of the changing special pattern displayed by the first special pattern display device 4A or the second special pattern display device 4B is referred to as a "jackpot due to special pattern."

The jackpot game state is a specific game state (advantageous state) that is advantageous to the player as a predetermined value is awarded, and a repeat continuation control is performed in which the special variable winning ball device 7 repeats an open state and a closed state a predetermined number of times. In the repeat continuation control, the state in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is open (the big winning opening is open) is called a round. The repeat continuation control is also called round control.

In the jackpot game state, the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened, and then closed when a predetermined end condition for the open state is met (either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds) has elapsed in the open state, or a predetermined number of winning balls (e.g., 10) have been generated). When the open end condition is met, a continuation right is generated and the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened again. The generation of the continuation right is repeated until the number of times the device is opened in the jackpot game state reaches a predetermined upper limit of 15 rounds (the final round).

The variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started when the first start condition (first execution condition) or the second start condition (second execution condition), which is the execution condition for the variable display, is met (for example, when the game ball passes through the first start winning port or the second start winning port as the start winning area (including winning)), and the start condition for the variable display is met (for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not being executed and a jackpot game is not being executed), and the display result (stopped symbol) is derived and displayed after the variable display time (change time) has elapsed. The game ball passing through means that the game ball has passed through an area that has been determined in advance as a winning area, such as a winning port or gate, and is a concept that includes the game ball entering the winning port (winning). The display result is derived and displayed means that the symbol (an example of identification information) is finally stopped and displayed (determined display).

In addition, for variable displays where the game ball has entered a start area such as the first start winning port and the second start winning port but the start conditions have not yet been met, storing information about the variable displays where the start conditions have not yet been met within a specified upper limit number is called reserved memory. The term reserved memory is also used to indicate (specify) the reserved information. Reserved memory is also called start memory or start winning memory.

For the first special symbol, the variable display is performed based on the first reserved memory, which is a reserved memory based on the entry of the gaming ball into the first start winning port. For the second special symbol, the variable display is performed based on the second reserved memory, which is a reserved memory based on the entry of the gaming ball into the second start winning port. If a jackpot occurs when such a first reserved memory or second reserved memory exists, the reserved memory that existed before the jackpot occurs is maintained as is, and is used for the variable display after the jackpot gaming state ends.

When a second start winning occurs in the second start winning slot, even if there is a reserved memory of a first start winning, the variable display of the second special symbol based on the second start winning is executed with priority. In this way, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol.

Above the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, there is provided a second reserve display device 25B consisting of four displays that show the number of valid winning balls that have entered the second start winning port, i.e., the second reserve memory number. The second reserve display device 25B increases the number of lit displays by one each time there is a valid start winning. And, each time a variable display is started on the second special pattern display device 4B, the number of lit displays is decreased by one.

Further above the second reserve indicator 25B, a first reserve indicator 25A is provided, which is made up of four indicators that indicate the number of valid winning balls that have entered the first start winning port, i.e., the first reserve memory number. The first reserve indicator 25A increases the number of indicators that light up by one every time a valid start winning occurs.
Then, each time a varying display is started in the first special pattern display device 4A, the number of lit displays is reduced by one.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game state and presentation state are controlled so that the player can enjoy a variety of games by shooting the game ball in either a "left hit" aimed at the left playing area or a "right hit" aimed at the right playing area depending on the game situation. The flow of the game after the player starts playing the pachinko gaming machine 1 is explained below.

When a player sits down at the pachinko game machine 1 and starts playing for the first time, he or she first plays by hitting the ball from the left so that the ball will enter the first start winning hole. Then, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, and if the display result is a jackpot (a jackpot with a special symbol), the player switches from hitting the ball from the left to hitting the ball from the right, and plays by aiming at the special variable winning ball device 7 that opens. After the jackpot game state ends, a right-hit promotion notification is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, encouraging the player to play by hitting the ball to the right. Specifically, a message such as "Aim to the right" is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

During the big win game state, the player aims to hit the opened special variable winning ball device 7 with a right shot.
During the jackpot game state, a right-hit promotion notification is made. After the jackpot game state ends, if the time-saving state described below is reached, the game continues with right-hit play. After the jackpot game ends, if the time-saving state is reached, a time-saving notification is made on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify the player that the time-saving state will begin. In addition, during the time-saving state, a right-hit promotion notification is also made. If the time-saving state does not occur after the jackpot game state ends, the right-hit promotion notification executed during the jackpot game state ends, and the player switches from right-hit to left-hit play and plays so that the game ball enters the first start winning hole. In addition, if the time-saving state is not reached, a left-hit promotion notification (also called a left-hit notification) may be made on the screen of the image display device 5 to encourage the player to play by returning to left-hit play.

During the time-saving state after the end of the big win game, the player plays by hitting the right hand to aim at the variable winning ball device 6B having the second start winning port. If the game ball enters the second start winning port and the display result is a big win (a big win with a special pattern), the player continues to hit the right hand to aim at the special variable winning ball device 7. Also, if the game ball enters the second start winning port and the display result is a small win display result, the operating port of the V-determination winning device 87 is opened in the small win game state, so the player continues to hit the right hand to aim at the V-determination winning device 87. At the start of the small win game state, a small win start notification is made on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify the player that the small win game state has started. In addition, when the game is controlled to a small win game state, a right-hit promotion notification is also issued at a specific timing (depending on the game situation, at the start of the small win display that is executed before the operating port of the V-judgment winning device 87 is opened in response to a small win, or at a specified timing before the small win display is executed).

When the operating port of the V-judgment winning device 87 is open due to the small win game state, a game ball falls from the operating port into the inside of the V-judgment winning device 87, enters the V-winning area 870 and is detected, and a V-winning occurs. When a V-winning occurs, a V-winning notification is made on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify that a V-winning has occurred. In addition, when the small win game state ends, a small win end notification is made on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify that the small win game state has ended. Then, after the small win ends, the game enters a big win game state and the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened, so the player continues playing by hitting with the right hand, aiming for the special variable winning ball device 7.

In addition, when playing a game aiming at the V-judgment winning device 87 in a small win game state, if the game ball does not enter the V winning area 870 but enters a non-specific area other than the V winning area 870, a big win does not occur. When a V win does not occur during a small win game state like this, a V winning failure notification is made on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify that a V win has failed. In addition, at the end of the small win game state, a small win end notification is made on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify that the small win game state has ended. Then, after the end of the small win game state, while the time-saving state continues, the player continues to play by aiming at the variable winning ball device 6B while still hitting from the right. When the time-saving state ends, the game is played by switching from hitting from the right to hitting from the left so that the game ball will win the first start winning hole. When the time-saving state ends, a time-saving end notification is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify the player that the time-saving state has ended, and a left-hand hit promotion notification is displayed to encourage the player to return to left-hand play.

Figure 8-2 is a diagram showing a winning type table. The winning type table shows, for each winning type, the conditions for a winning jackpot to occur, the control state (game state) after the winning jackpot, the number of times the jackpot opens (number of rounds), and the opening time of each round in the winning jackpot. In this embodiment, the winning types include a 15R time-saving winning jackpot, a 4R time-saving winning jackpot, a 16 (15)R time-saving winning jackpot via a small winning jackpot, a 9 (8)R time-saving winning jackpot via a small winning jackpot, and a 5 (4)R time-saving winning jackpot via a small winning jackpot. The number in parentheses for a winning jackpot via a small winning jackpot indicates the number of times the special variable winning ball device 7 opens.

A small win occurs when a game ball enters the second start winning hole provided in the variable winning ball device 6B and the display result of the second special symbol becomes a small win symbol. The determination of whether the display result of the special symbol is a small win symbol or not is made in advance by random number lottery (special symbol small win determination).
When a small win occurs, the game enters a small win game state, and the operation port of the V-judgment winning device 87 opens in an opening pattern of 10 openings and an opening time of 0.1 seconds. The game control state (the probability of a big win, the probability of a small win, and the base, which will be described later) after the end of the small win game state is the same as before the small win.
In the case of a small win, a prize ball is paid out for a game ball that has won in the V winning area 870 in the V-determining winning device 87 during the small win game state. During the small win game state, it is set that about 10 winning balls can be generated, and it is set that about 30 winning balls can be paid out according to the winning balls.

When the V-judgment winning device 87 is opened and the game ball enters the V-judgment winning area 870 (V-winning) inside the V-judgment winning device 87, a big win occurs. Such a big win via a small win is called a small win via big win. A small win via big win includes a 16 (15) R time-saving big win via a small win, a 9 (8) R time-saving big win via a small win, and a 5 (4) R time-saving big win via a small win, which have different numbers of rounds in the big win. A small win that is linked to become a 16 (15) R time-saving big win is called a first small win. A small win that is linked to become a 9 (8) R time-saving big win is called a second small win. A small win that is linked to become a 5 (4) R time-saving big win is called a third small win.

On the other hand, a jackpot that occurs directly from the variable display of a special symbol, without going through a small jackpot, is called a pattern jackpot. Pattern jackpots include the 15R pattern time-saving jackpot, which occurs directly based on the variable display of the first or second special symbol, and the 4R pattern time-saving jackpot.

In this way, jackpots include pattern jackpots that occur directly based on the varying display of the first or second special pattern, and small jackpots that occur by V entry via a small jackpot based on the varying display of the second special pattern. Each pattern jackpot and small jackpot is a jackpot that is controlled to a time-saving state after the jackpot game state ends, and is called a time-saving jackpot. In this embodiment, the advantageous state that is advantageous to the player also includes the opening of the special variable winning ball device 7.

A 15R time-saving jackpot is a jackpot in which the large prize opening is opened 15 times (15R). A 4R time-saving jackpot is a jackpot in which the large prize opening is opened 4 times (4R). A 16 (15)R time-saving jackpot via small jackpot is a jackpot in which the V-determined prize-winning device 87 is opened once (0.1 seconds x 10 times), and then the large prize opening is opened 15 times (15R) on the condition of a V winning. Although the prize-winning device is opened for 16 rounds, the large prize opening is actually opened 15 times, and the player feels that the opening of the large prize opening is the same type of jackpot as a 15R time-saving jackpot. The 9 (8) R time-saving jackpot via small win is a jackpot in which the V-determined winning device 87 opens (0.1 seconds x 10 times) and then the large winning hole opens 8 times (8R) on the condition of a V win. The 5 (4) R time-saving jackpot via small win is a jackpot in which the V-determined winning device 87 opens once (0.1 seconds x 10 times) and then the large winning hole opens 4 times (4R) on the condition of a V win. The winning device opens for 5 rounds, but the large winning hole is actually opened 4 times, and the player feels that the opening of the large winning hole is the same type of jackpot as the 4R time-saving jackpot with respect to the pattern.

The time-saving state after the 4R time-saving jackpot has two end conditions: one in which the second special symbol is displayed once, and the other in which the first and second special symbols are displayed five times in total. The number of times for the time-saving end condition in which the second special symbol is displayed once is set in consideration of the fact that the game ball that entered the V-judgment winning device 87 enters the V-winning area 870 at a 100% rate. When the second special symbol is displayed once, a small win occurs at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the end condition in which the second special symbol is displayed once is set as the number of times that a jackpot via a small win may occur when the second special symbol is displayed once.

The number of times the second special symbol is displayed once as the time-saving end condition is set for the following reason. In the case of a 4R time-saving jackpot, the time-saving state (including the electric support state) is basically continued until the second special symbol is displayed once, but to display the second special symbol, it is necessary to hit the ball from the right to make the ball enter the passage gate 41 and open the variable winning ball device 6B, and in that state, the ball must enter the variable winning ball device 6B. It may take time to make the ball enter the variable winning ball device 6B, and the first special symbol that has been reserved and stored may be displayed first.

Therefore, the end condition of the total number of times the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed five times is a condition for ensuring that one display of the second special symbol, which is likely to be determined as a jackpot advantageous to the player, can be executed even if the display of the first special symbol is started based on the reserved memory based on the first start winning of which up to four can be stored before the jackpot game state immediately after the start of the time-saving state and before the condition for starting the display of the second special symbol is met. In this way, it is possible to prevent the display of the second special symbol, which is likely to be determined as a jackpot advantageous to the player, from not being executed in the time-saving state, due to the display of the first special symbol is started based on the reserved memory based on the first start winning immediately after the start of the time-saving state.

After a jackpot other than the 4R time-saving jackpot, two ending states are set: an ending condition in which the number of times the second special symbol changes is 7, and an ending condition in which the total number of times the first special symbol and the second special symbol change is 11. The number of times 7 for the ending condition of the time-saving state is set in consideration of the fact that the game ball that entered the V-judgment winning device 87 enters the V-winning area 870 at a rate of 100%. In the variable display of the second special symbol, a small win occurs at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the ending condition in which the number of times the second special symbol changes is 7 is set to a number that significantly increases the possibility of a jackpot via a small win when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, compared to the 4R time-saving jackpot. This makes it possible to draw the player's attention to the occurrence of a jackpot via a small win, and to increase the player's expectations for the occurrence of a jackpot via a small win.

The end condition of the total number of times the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed is 11 times, so that even if the display of the first special symbol based on the reserved memory based on the first start winning (up to four symbols can be stored) starts immediately after the start of the time-saving state before the condition for starting the display of the second special symbol is met, the display of the seven times the second special symbol, which is likely to be determined as a jackpot advantageous to the player, can be reliably executed. This makes it possible to prevent a decrease in the number of times the second special symbol, which is likely to be determined as a jackpot advantageous to the player, changes in the time-saving state, from starting the display of the first special symbol based on the reserved memory based on the first start winning immediately after the start of the time-saving state.

In this embodiment, in the low base state, which is the normal state, the first start winning port is set so that winning can be made from the first path, so that the game ball flowing down the first path is more advantageous to the player in terms of starting winning than the game ball flowing down the second path. On the other hand, in an advantageous state such as a big win game state, the special variable winning ball device 7 that is opened is set so that winning can be made from the second path, so that the game ball flowing down the second path is more advantageous to the player in terms of winning at the time of a big win than the game ball flowing down the first path. Also, in a specific state such as a small win game state, the V-determined winning device 87 that is opened is set so that winning can be made from the second path, so that the game ball flowing down the second path is more advantageous to the player in terms of the occurrence of a big win than the game ball flowing down the first path.

In addition to the above comparison of advantages, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which, for example, other winning ports (for example, other variable winning ports (which may be for starting winning or non-starting winning) are provided on the first and second paths, and in a low base state as the normal state, it is easier to win at the variable winning port via the first path than via the second path, and in other states such as a high base state, a big win game state, and a small win game state, it is easier to win at the variable winning port via the second path than via the first path, such that in the normal state, it is more advantageous for the player if the gaming medium flows down the first path, and in other game states, it is more advantageous for the player if the gaming medium flows down the second path.

Figure 8-3 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. In Figure 8-3, the type of random number, update range, use, and addition conditions are shown. Each random number is used as follows.

(1) Random R: A random counter for determining whether or not a jackpot will be generated and whether or not a small jackpot will be generated. Random 1 is updated by 1 at 10 MHz, and is updated by incrementing from 0 to its upper limit of 65535, and then is updated by incrementing from 0 again. (2) Random 1: Determines the type of jackpot (type, 15R time-saving jackpot, 4R time-saving jackpot, 16(15)R time-saving jackpot via small jackpot, 9(8)R time-saving jackpot via small jackpot, and 5(4)R time-saving jackpot via small jackpot) and the jackpot pattern (for jackpot type determination, for jackpot pattern determination). (3) Random 2: Determines the type (type) of the fluctuation pattern (for fluctuation pattern type determination). (4) Random 3: Determines the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) (for fluctuation pattern determination). (5) Random 4: Determines whether or not a win based on a normal symbol will occur (for determining whether a win occurs based on a normal symbol). (6) Random 5: Determines the initial value of Random 5 (for determining the initial value of Random 5).

In this embodiment, the specific game state jackpot includes multiple types, such as a 15R time-saving jackpot, a 4R time-saving jackpot, a 16 (15)R time-saving jackpot via a small jackpot, a 9 (8)R time-saving jackpot via a small jackpot, and a 5 (4)R time-saving jackpot via a small jackpot. Therefore, when a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot based on the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random R), or when a small jackpot is determined to be a small jackpot, the type of jackpot is determined to be one of these jackpot types based on the value of the random number for jackpot type determination (random 1). However, in the case of a jackpot via a small jackpot, if a V prize does not occur, the determined jackpot is invalid. Furthermore, when the type of jackpot is determined, the jackpot pattern is also determined based on the value of the random number for jackpot type determination (random 1). Therefore, random 1 is also a random number for determining the jackpot pattern. In addition, when the type of small win is decided, the small win symbol is also decided at the same time. Therefore, Random 1 is also the random number used to decide the small win symbol.

Furthermore, the fluctuation pattern is determined by first determining the fluctuation pattern type using a random number for determining the fluctuation pattern type (Random 2), and then determining one of the fluctuation patterns included in the determined fluctuation pattern type using a random number for determining the fluctuation pattern (Random 3). In this manner, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process. A fluctuation pattern type is a grouping of multiple fluctuation patterns according to the characteristics of their fluctuation modes. One or multiple fluctuation patterns belong to a fluctuation pattern type.

In this embodiment, the fluctuation patterns are classified into normal fluctuation pattern types, which are fluctuation pattern types that do not involve a reach, and reach fluctuation pattern types, which are fluctuation pattern types that involve a reach.

Figure 8-4 is an explanatory diagram showing the first special chart hit determination table, the second special chart hit determination table, and various jackpot type determination tables. These tables are stored in ROM 101.

Figure 8-4 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the first special symbol hit determination table. The first special symbol hit determination table is a data table for determining a hit for the first special symbol, and is a table in which a hit determination value that is compared with random R is set. The "probability" shown in Figure 8-4 (A) indicates the probability (percentage) of a hit.

The probability of winning the first special symbol varies depending on the setting value. At setting 1 it is 1/199, at setting 2 it is 1/190, at setting 3 it is 1/180, at setting 4 it is 1/170, at setting 5 it is 1/160, and at setting 6 it is 1/150. Therefore, the probability of winning is highest in the following order: setting 1 < setting 2 < setting 3 < setting 4 < setting 5 < setting 6.

Figure 8-4 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the second special symbol hit determination table. The second special symbol hit determination table is a data table for making big hit and small hit determinations for the second special symbol, and is a table in which a big hit determination value and a small hit determination value to be compared with random R are set. The upper section in Figure 8-4 (B) is the big hit determination table section, and the lower section in Figure 8-4 (B) is the small hit determination table section. The "probability" shown in the upper section of Figure 8-4 (B) indicates the probability (percentage) of a big hit, and the "probability" shown in the lower section of Figure 8-4 (B) indicates the probability (percentage) of a small hit.

The probability of a big win with the second special symbol varies depending on the setting value. It is 1/199 with setting 1, 1/190 with setting 2, 1/180 with setting 3, 1/170 with setting 4, 1/160 with setting 5, and 1/150 with setting 6. Therefore, the probability of a big win increases in the following order: setting 1 < setting 2 < setting 3 < setting 4 < setting 5 < setting 6. In contrast, the probability of a small win with the second special symbol is set to 1/7.35 regardless of the setting value. A small win may be set for the first special symbol. In such a case, it is desirable to make the probability of a small win lower for the first special symbol than for the second special symbol. For example, the probability of a small win with the first special symbol may be set to 1/100.

When the CPU 103 detects a start winning entry into the first start winning entry port (first start winning entry) or a start winning entry into the second start winning entry port (second start winning entry), it extracts the count value (random R) of the random number circuit 124 at a predetermined timing. For the first start winning entry, the extracted value is compared with the jackpot determination value set in the first special symbol hit determination table, and if the extracted value matches any of the jackpot determination values, it is determined that the first special symbol will be a jackpot. For the second start winning entry, the extracted value is compared with the jackpot determination value set in the second special symbol hit determination table, and if the extracted value matches any of the jackpot determination values, it is determined that the second special symbol will be a jackpot. Then, when the extracted value does not match any of the jackpot determination values, the extracted value is compared with the small jackpot determination value set in the second special symbol hit determination table, and if the extracted value matches any of the small jackpot determination values, it is determined that the second special symbol will be a small jackpot. Deciding to have a small hit also means provisionally deciding to have a big hit via a small hit (it is written as provisionally deciding because if no V win occurs during the small hit, it will not be controlled as a big hit).

Deciding whether to get a big win or not means deciding whether to transition to a big win game state, but also deciding whether to make the stopped pattern resulting from the variable display of the first special pattern or the second special pattern the big win pattern. Deciding whether to get a small win or not means deciding whether to transition to a small win game state, but also deciding whether to make the stopped pattern resulting from the variable display of the second special pattern the small win pattern.

Figures 8-4 (C), (D), and (E) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table stored in ROM 101. Figure 8-4 (C) is a first special pattern jackpot type determination table used to determine the jackpot type of a pattern jackpot when a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot by the first special pattern. Figure 8-4 (D) is a second special pattern jackpot type determination table used to determine the jackpot type of a pattern jackpot when a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot by the second special pattern.

The first special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 8-4(C) has a value to be compared with the value of Random 2 for jackpot type determination, and has jackpot determination values corresponding to the "15R pattern time-saving jackpot" and the "4R pattern time-saving jackpot".The second special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 8-4(D) has a value to be compared with the value of Random 1, and has a jackpot determination value corresponding to the "15R pattern time-saving jackpot".

Also, as shown in Figures 8-4 (C) and (D), the jackpot type judgment value is also used as a judgment value (jackpot pattern judgment value) that determines the jackpot patterns of the first special pattern and the second special pattern. For example, the judgment value corresponding to an "8R time-saving jackpot" is also set as a judgment value corresponding to the jackpot pattern "3". The judgment value corresponding to a "15R time-saving jackpot" is also set as a judgment value corresponding to the jackpot pattern "7".

Using these various jackpot type determination tables, the CPU 103 determines the jackpot type that corresponds to the jackpot type determination value with which the value of Random 1 matches, and determines the jackpot pattern with which the value of Random 1 matches, as the jackpot pattern. This simultaneously determines the jackpot type and the jackpot pattern that corresponds to the jackpot type.

In the small hit via jackpot type determination table in FIG. 8-4(E), a numerical value to be compared with the value of Random 2 for jackpot type determination is set, which corresponds to each of "small hit via 16(15)R time-saving jackpot", "small hit via 9(8)R time-saving jackpot", and "small hit via 5(4)R time-saving jackpot". However, the jackpot type determined by the small hit via jackpot type determination table is a provisional jackpot type linked to each of the first small hit (16(15)R time-saving jackpot), the second small hit (9(8)R time-saving jackpot), and the third small hit (5(4)R time-saving jackpot), and is invalid if no V win occurs during the small hit game state.

Figures 8-5 and 8-6 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of a presentation control command sent by the game control microcomputer 100. Figures 8-5 and 8-6 show the relationship between specific command data for the presentation control command and the command name and command specification. As shown in Figures 8-5 and 8-6, the game control microcomputer 100 sends various presentation control commands to the presentation control CPU 120 depending on the game control state.

The main commands in Figures 8-5 and 8-6 are explained below. Command 80XX (H) is a performance control command (variation pattern command) that specifies the variation pattern to be displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol (each corresponds to a variation pattern XX). When a unique number is assigned to each of multiple variation patterns, there is a variation pattern command that corresponds to each variation pattern identified by that number. "(H)" indicates a hexadecimal number. The performance control command that specifies the variation pattern is also a command for specifying the start of variation. Therefore, when the performance control CPU 120 receives command 80XX (H), it controls the performance display device to start a performance that corresponds to the variable display of the special symbol.

Commands 8C01(H) to 8C06(H) are display result specification commands that show display results including miss display results, jackpot type, jackpot display results for each small jackpot type, and small jackpot display results.

Command 8D01 (H) is a first pattern change designation command that indicates that the display of the first special pattern change should begin. Command 8D02 (H) is a second pattern change designation command that indicates that the display of the second special pattern change should begin. Command 8F00 (H) is a pattern determination designation command that specifies that the display of the first and second special patterns should end.

Commands A001 to A005 (H) are jackpot start designation commands that specify the start of the jackpot game state for each type of jackpot.

Command A1XX (H) is a command for specifying when the large prize opening is open, indicating that the large prize opening is open for the number of times (rounds) indicated by XX. A2XX (H) is a command for specifying when the large prize opening is closed, indicating that the large prize opening has been opened for the number of times (rounds) indicated by XX.

Commands A301 to A305 (H) are jackpot end designation commands that specify the end of the jackpot game state for each type of jackpot.

Command A401(H) is a first start winning designation command that specifies that a first start winning has occurred. Command A402(H) is a second start winning designation command that specifies that a second start winning has occurred.

Command B000 (H) is a normal state designation command that specifies that the game state is normal (low base state). Command B001 (H) is a first time-saving state designation command that specifies that the game state is first time-saving state (high base state). Command B002 (H) is a second time-saving state designation command that specifies that the game state is second time-saving state (high base state).

Command C0XX(H) is a first reserved memory number specification command that specifies the first reserved memory number. The "XX" in command C0XX(H) indicates the first reserved memory number. Command C1XX(H) is a second reserved memory number specification command that specifies the second reserved memory number. The "XX" in command C0XX(H) indicates the second reserved memory number.

In this embodiment, when the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts the number of reserved memories, it sends a reserved memory number designation command that specifies the number of reserved memories after subtraction, but this is not limited to this, and a reserved memory number subtraction designation command that specifies that the number of reserved memories is to be subtracted by 1 for each of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number may also be used.

Commands C2XX(H) and C3XX(H) are presentation control commands that indicate the contents of the winning judgment results, such as a jackpot judgment, a jackpot type judgment, and a fluctuation pattern type judgment, when a starting winning is made at the first or second starting winning port. Of these, command C2XX(H) is a designation command that indicates whether or not a winning judgment result will be a jackpot, whether or not a small win will be made, and the type of jackpot judgment result. In addition, command C3XX(H) is a fluctuation type command that indicates the judgment result of which judgment value range the value of the fluctuation pattern type judgment random number falls into (fluctuation pattern type judgment result) among the winning judgment results.

Command C401 (H) is a command that specifies the start of the first small win. Command C402 (H) is a command that specifies the start of the second small win. Command C403 (H) is a command that specifies the start of the third small win. Command C501 (H) is a command that specifies the start of the first small win. Command C502 (H) is a command that specifies the start of the second small win. Command C503 (H) is a command that specifies the start of the third small win. Command C601 (H) is a V winning specification command that specifies that a V winning has occurred. Command C602 (H) is a V winning ball detection specification command that specifies that a winning ball (including both a V winning ball and a winning ball other than a V winning ball) has been detected in the V determination winning device 87.

In the game control microcomputer 100, a first reserved memory buffer is provided in the RAM 102 for storing reserved memory information for the first special symbol. A storage area corresponding to the upper limit of the first reserved memory number (4 in this example) is secured in the first reserved memory buffer. The first reserved memory buffer stores a hardware random number for determining a jackpot (Random R), and software random numbers for determining the type of jackpot (Random 1), the type of fluctuation pattern (Random 2), and the type of fluctuation pattern (Random 3).

For the second special symbol, a second reserved memory buffer is provided in RAM 102 for storing reserved memory information for the second special symbol. A storage area corresponding to the upper limit of the second reserved memory count (4 in this example) is secured in the second reserved memory buffer. The second reserved memory buffer stores a hardware random number for determining a jackpot (Random R), and software random numbers for determining the type of jackpot (Random 1), the type of fluctuation pattern (Random 2), and the type of fluctuation pattern (Random 3).

Based on a win at the first start winning port, the CPU 103 executes a process of extracting random numbers from the random number circuit 124 and the random counter for generating software random numbers, and saving (storing) them in a storage area in the first reserved memory buffer. Specifically, based on a win at the first start winning port, these random numbers are extracted and saved (stored) in the first reserved memory buffer. Based on a win at the second start winning port, the CPU 103 executes a process of extracting random numbers from the random number circuit 124 and the random counter for generating software random numbers, and saving (storing) them in a storage area in the second reserved memory buffer. Specifically, based on a win at the second start winning port, these random numbers are extracted and saved (stored) in the second reserved memory buffer.

In this way, storing information about the start winning in the reserved memory buffer may be referred to as "reserved storage." Note that the random number for determining the type of fluctuation pattern (Random 2) and the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern (Random 3) may be extracted when the special pattern begins to fluctuate, rather than being extracted at the time of the start winning and stored in advance in the reserved memory buffer.

Figure 8-7 is a flowchart showing the start port switch passing process executed as part of S101. In the start port switch passing process, the CPU 103 first checks whether the first start port switch 22A is on (S1211). If the first start port switch 22A is not on, the process proceeds to S1221. If the first start port switch 22A is on, the CPU 103 checks whether the first reserved memory count has reached the upper limit (specifically, whether the value of the first reserved memory count counter for counting the first reserved memory count is 4) (S1212). If the first reserved memory count has reached the upper limit, the process proceeds to S1221.

If the first reserved memory count has not reached the upper limit, the CPU 103 increments the value of the first reserved memory count counter by 1 (S1213). Next, the CPU 103 executes a process of extracting values from the random number circuit 124 or a counter for generating software random numbers, and storing them in a storage area in the first reserved memory buffer (S1214). In the process of S1214, a random number for determining a jackpot (Random R), a random number for determining a jackpot type (Random 1), a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern type (Random 2), and a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern (Random 3) are extracted and stored in the storage area.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a winning performance process that determines in advance at the time of the starting winning the result of the change display and the type of the change pattern when a change based on the starting winning of the detected first special symbol is subsequently executed (S1215).

In this embodiment, when a start winning occurs at the first start winning port or the second start winning port, and various data obtained at the time of the start winning is stored as reserved memory information, and then the condition for starting the variable display is established, at the timing to start the variable display, in the normal special pattern processing (S110), a decision is made based on the reserved memory information regarding the special pattern (first special pattern or second special pattern) that starts the variable display, as to whether the variable display result is a jackpot display result or not, and the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot determination value and the jackpot type determination value set in response to the various random number values described above. Then, in the variable pattern setting processing (S111), the variable pattern (including the determination of the variable pattern type) is determined based on the variable pattern type determination value and the variable pattern determination value set in response to the various random number values described above.

On the other hand, apart from such a determination, the reserved memory information that stores various data obtained at the time of the start winning is read ahead at the timing before the variable display based on the start winning into the first start winning port or the second start winning port is started, specifically, at the timing when the game ball starts winning into the first start winning port or the second start winning port (the timing when the reserved memory information is stored), and based on the reserved memory information read ahead, a winning time performance process is executed in which a determination is made in advance as to whether or not there will be a big win, whether or not there will be a small win, the type of big win, and the type of variation pattern based on the big win determination value, big win type determination value, and variation pattern type determination value set in response to the various random number values described above. By doing so, the performance control CPU 120 can predict the result of the variable display before the variable display of the performance pattern is executed, and based on the various determination results at the time of the start winning, it is possible to execute a pre-reading performance such as a pre-reading notice that warns of a big win (possibility of a big win) during the variable display of the performance pattern.

Then, based on the result of the winning performance process, the CPU 103 controls the sending of a symbol designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (S1216) and the sending of a variable type command to the performance control CPU 120 (S1217). The CPU 103 also controls the sending of a first start winning designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (S1218), and also controls the sending of a first reserved memory number designation command to the performance control CPU 120 by setting the value of the first reserved memory number counter to EXT data (S1219).

By executing the processes of S1216 and S1217, in this embodiment, regardless of the game state (game state such as high probability state, low probability state, high base state, low base state, jackpot game state, etc.), both the pattern designation command and the variation type command are always sent to the performance control CPU 120 each time a start winning occurs in the first start winning port.

In addition, in this embodiment, by executing the processes of S1216 to S1219, when a start winning occurs in the first start winning port, a set of four commands, namely, a pattern designation command, a variable type command, a first start winning designation command, and a first reserved memory number designation command, is sent all at once within one timer interrupt.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the second start port switch 22B is on (S1221). If the second start port switch 22B is not on, the process ends. If the second start port switch 22B is on, the CPU 103 checks whether the second reserved memory count has reached the upper limit (specifically, whether the value of the second reserved memory count counter for counting the second reserved memory count is 4) (S1222). If the second reserved memory count has reached the upper limit, the process ends.

If the second reserved memory count has not reached the upper limit, the CPU 103 increments the value of the second reserved memory count counter by 1 (S1223). Next, the CPU 103 executes a process of extracting values from the random number circuit 124 or a counter for generating software random numbers, and storing them in a storage area in the second reserved memory buffer (S1224). In the process of S1224, a random number for determining a jackpot (Random R), a random number for determining a jackpot type (Random 1), a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern type (Random 2), and a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern (Random 3) are extracted and stored in the storage area.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a winning performance process similar to the winning performance process described in S1215 for the start winning of the detected second special symbol (S1225). Then, the CPU 103 controls the sending of a symbol designation command to the performance control CPU 120 based on the judgment result of the winning performance process (S1226), and controls the sending of a variable type command to the performance control CPU 120 (S1227). The CPU 103 also controls the sending of a second starting winning designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (S1228), and controls the sending of a second reserved memory number designation command to the performance control CPU 120 by setting the value of the second reserved memory number counter to EXT data (S1229).

By executing the processes of S1226 and S1227, in this embodiment, regardless of the game state (game state such as high probability state, low probability state, high base state, low base state, jackpot game state, etc.), both the pattern designation command and the variation type command are always sent to the performance control CPU 120 every time a start winning occurs in the second start winning port.

In addition, in this embodiment, by executing the processes of S1226 to S1229, when a start winning occurs in the second start winning port, a set of four commands, namely, a pattern designation command, a variable type command, a second start winning designation command, and a second reserved memory number designation command, is sent all at once within one timer interrupt.

Figure 8-8 is a flow chart showing the normal special symbol processing (S110) in the special symbol process processing. In the normal special symbol processing, the CPU 103 checks whether there is reserved memory data in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer (S51). If there is no reserved memory data in either the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer, the processing ends.

If there is no reserved memory data in the reserved memory buffer in S51, the process ends after performing a process (S80) for sending a customer waiting demo designation command. On the other hand, if there is reserved memory data in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer in S51, the CPU 103 checks whether there is reserved memory data in the second reserved memory buffer (S52). If there is reserved memory data in the second reserved memory buffer, the special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is set to data indicating "second" (S54). On the other hand, if there is no reserved memory data in the second reserved memory buffer, the special symbol pointer is set to data indicating "first" (S53).

In this embodiment, depending on whether data indicating "first" or "second" is set in the special pattern pointer, the first special pattern display device 4A displays the first special pattern and the second special pattern display device 4B displays the second special pattern using a common processing routine. When data indicating "first" is set in the special pattern pointer, the first special pattern display device 4A displays the first special pattern based on the reserved memory data stored in the first reserved memory buffer. On the other hand, when data indicating "second" is set in the special pattern pointer, the second special pattern display device 4B displays the second special pattern based on the reserved memory data stored in the second reserved memory buffer.

By the control of S52 to S54, if there is at least one second reserved memory data in the second reserved memory buffer, the variable display of the second special pattern display device 4B based on the data of the second reserved memory is executed in priority over the variable display of the first special pattern display device 4A based on the data of the first reserved memory.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area in the RAM 102 corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer, and stores it in the reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102 (S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first," the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area in the first reserved memory buffer corresponding to the first reserved memory number=1, and stores it in the random number buffer of the RAM 102. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second," the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area in the second reserved memory buffer corresponding to the second reserved memory number=1, and stores it in the random number buffer of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the reserved memory number counter indicated by the special pattern pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (S56). Specifically, when the special pattern pointer indicates "first," the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the first reserved memory number counter, and shifts the contents of each storage area in the first reserved memory buffer. Also, when the special pattern pointer indicates "second," the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the second reserved memory number counter, and erases the contents of the storage area in the second reserved memory buffer.

In other words, when the special symbol pointer indicates "1st", the CPU 103 stores each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102 in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n-1. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "2nd", the CPU 103 stores each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102 in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n-1.

Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to each first pending memory number are extracted always matches the order of the first pending memory numbers = 1, 2, 3, 4. Also, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to each second pending memory number are extracted always matches the order of the second pending memory numbers = 1, 2, 3, 4.

The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a reserved memory number designation command to the performance control CPU 120, based on the value of the reserved memory number counter pointed to by the special pattern pointer after subtraction (S59). In this case, if the special pattern pointer is set to a value indicating "first", the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a first reserved memory number designation command. Also, if the special pattern pointer is set to a value indicating "second", the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a second reserved memory number designation command.

In the normal special symbol processing, first, data indicating "first" indicating that processing is to be performed on the first start winning slot, i.e., data indicating "first" indicating that processing is to be performed on the first special symbol, or data indicating "second" indicating that processing is to be performed on the second start winning slot, i.e., data indicating "second" indicating that processing is to be performed on the second special symbol, is set in the special symbol pointer. Then, in subsequent processing in the special symbol process processing, processing is performed according to the data set in the special symbol pointer. Thus, it is possible to make it common to the cases where the first special symbol is the target and the case where the second special symbol is the target.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out Random R (random number for determining a jackpot) from the random number buffer and executes the jackpot determination module (S61). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the random number for determining a jackpot that was extracted in S1214 of the start port switch passing process or S1224 of the start port switch passing process and stored in the reserved memory buffer or random number buffer, and performs a jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that executes a process that compares a predetermined jackpot determination value or small jackpot determination value with the random number for determining a jackpot, and if they match, determines that a jackpot or small jackpot has occurred. In other words, it is a program that executes a process for determining a jackpot or a small jackpot.

In the jackpot determination process, if the first special symbol matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 8-4(A), or if the second special symbol matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 8-4(B), it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. If it is determined that there is a jackpot (Y in S61), the process moves to S71. Determining whether or not there is a jackpot means determining whether or not to transition to a jackpot game state, but also determining whether or not to treat the stopped symbol on the special symbol display as a jackpot symbol.

If it is determined in S61 that a jackpot has occurred (Y in S61), a jackpot flag indicating a jackpot is set (S71).

Next, it is determined whether the special symbol pointer is pointing to "1st" (S72). If the special symbol pointer is pointing to "1st", the first special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 8-4 (C) is selected (S73) and the process proceeds to S75. On the other hand, if the special symbol pointer is not pointing to "1st" (if it is pointing to "2nd"), the second special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 8-4 (D) is selected (S74) and the process proceeds to S75.

In S75, using the jackpot type determination table selected in S73 or S74, the jackpot type corresponding to the value that matches the random number (RANDOM 1) for jackpot type determination stored in the random number buffer area is determined as the jackpot type (S75), and the process proceeds to S81.

In addition, if the value of the random number for determining a big win (random R) does not match any of the big win determination values in S61 (N in S61), it is checked whether the data set in the special symbol pointer is data indicating "second" to check whether the target of the big win determination is the variable display of the second special symbol (S76). If the data set in the special symbol pointer in S76 is not data indicating "second" (the variable display of the first special symbol), the process proceeds to S82 described later. On the other hand, if the data set in the special symbol pointer in S76 is data indicating "second" (the variable display of the second special symbol), the second special symbol hit determination table in FIG. 8-4 (B) is used to determine whether the value of the random number for determining a big win (random R) matches any of the small win determination values, thereby performing the small win determination process (S77). In other words, if the value of the random number (random R) for determining a big win matches any of the small win determination values shown in FIG. 8-4 (B) (Y in S77), it is decided that a small win will occur for the second special symbol. Then, if it is decided that a small win will occur (Y in S77), a small win flag indicating a small win will be set (S78).

After setting the small hit flag, the small hit via big hit type determination table in FIG. 8-4 (E) is selected (S79), and the big hit type corresponding to the value that matches the value of the random number (RANDOM 1) for big hit type determination stored in the random number buffer area is determined as the type of big hit via small hit (S80). Then, proceed to S81. On the other hand, if the value of the random number (RANDOM R) for small hit determination does not match any of the small hit determination values in S77 (N in S77), proceed to S82 described below.

In S81, data indicating the type of the jackpot determined in S75 or S80 is stored in the jackpot type buffer in RAM 102 (S81), and the process proceeds to S82. For example, if the jackpot type is a "15R time-saving jackpot with a pattern", "01" is set in the jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type, and if the jackpot type is a "4R time-saving jackpot with a pattern", "02" is set in the jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type. On the other hand, if the jackpot type is a "16 (15)R time-saving jackpot via a small jackpot", "03" is set in a temporary jackpot type buffer separate from the jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type. If the jackpot type is a 9 (8)R time-saving jackpot via a small jackpot, "04" is set in the temporary jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type. If the jackpot type is a 5 (4) R time-limited jackpot via small jackpot, the provisional jackpot type buffer is set to "05" as data indicating the jackpot type. Of these, data indicating a 16 (15) R time-limited jackpot via small jackpot, a 9 (8) R time-limited jackpot via small jackpot, and a 5 (4) R time-limited jackpot via small jackpot are provisionally set as they are invalid data that will not result in a jackpot if no V win occurs during a small jackpot game state.

In S82, the stopping symbol of the special symbol is set (S78). Specifically, if neither the big win flag nor the small win flag is set, the stopping symbol of the special symbol is set to "-", which is a miss symbol. If the small win flag is set, the stopping symbol of the special symbol is determined to be one of the small win symbols "1", "5", or "9" according to the small win type selected and determined in S80. If the big win flag is set, the stopping symbol of the special symbol is determined to be one of the big win symbols "3" or "7" according to the big win type selected and determined in S75. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variable pattern setting process (S111) (S79).

Figure 8-9 is a flow chart showing the small win opening pre-processing (S118). In the small win opening pre-processing, the CPU 103 operates the movable part 872 to the open state by controlling the solenoid 22 based on the opening mode of the small win, and starts the opening operation of the operating port of the V-judgment winning device 87 (S411). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a small win start designation command indicating that the small win game state is to start to the performance control CPU 120 (S412). Next, the CPU 103 sets the V-judgment winning number counter as a counting means to use the number of winnings in the V-winning area 870 in the small win opening state as the end condition of the opening state (S413). Specifically, in S413, the counter value of the V-judgment winning number counter is set to "10" and the setting is made to count down the number of V-winnings. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the small win release process (S119) (S414).

Figure 8-10 is a flow chart showing the small win opening process (S119) in the special symbol process. In the small win opening process, the CPU 103 updates the small win opening control timer by subtracting -1 (S430). Next, in S435 described later, it is confirmed whether the count value of the V-judgment winning number counter, which counts the number of V winning balls, is "0" (S431). The V-judgment winning number counter is set to "10" by S413 in Figure 8-9, and when 10 V winning balls are counted, the count value becomes "0". If the count value of the V-judgment winning number counter is "0" in S430, proceed to S441. On the other hand, if the count value of the V-judgment winning number counter is not "0" in S430, it is confirmed whether the small win opening control timer has timed out (timer value = 0) (S432).

If the small win opening control timer has timed out in S432, proceed to S441. On the other hand, if the small win opening control timer has not timed out in S432, the solenoid 22 is controlled in accordance with the count value of the small win opening control timer based on the opening mode of the small win to operate the movable part 872 to an open state, and processing is performed to open and close the operating port of the V-judgment winning device 87 (S433).

Next, in order to determine whether a V winning has been detected by a game ball entering the V winning area 870, which is in an open state inside the V determination winning device 87, it is determined whether the V winning switch 87a is in an on state (S434). When it is in an on state in S434, it means that a V winning has been detected, and a V winning flag, which is set when a V winning is detected, is set (S435). Then, a process is performed to transmit a V winning ball detection designation command (S436). This allows the performance control CPU 120 to recognize that a V winning ball has been detected, and it becomes possible to recognize the number of V winnings. Next, the solenoid is driven to operate the opening and closing member, changing the V winning port of the V winning area 870 from an open state to a closed state (S437), and proceeding to S439. As a result, when the first game ball that enters the V-judgment winning device 87 enters the V-winning hole of the V-winning area 870 is closed, and all game balls that enter the V-judgment winning device 87 thereafter are guided to the winning ball area and detected by the V-judgment winning switch 15a.

On the other hand, if the V winning judgment switch 15a is not in the on state in S434, it means that a V winning has not been detected, and it is determined whether the V winning judgment switch 15a is in the on state (S438).
If it is ON in S438, the process proceeds to S439, and if it is not ON in S438, the process ends.

In S439, the count value of the V-judgment winning ball number counter, which was set to "10" in S413 of FIG. 8-9, is counted down by "-1" (S439), and a process is performed to send a V-judgment winning ball detection designation command (S440). This allows the performance control CPU 120 to recognize that a V-judgment winning ball that has entered the judgment winning device 87 has been detected after the V-judgment winning ball has been detected, and it becomes possible to recognize the number of game balls that have entered the judgment winning device 87.

When the count value of the V-judgment winning number counter is "0" in S431, the small winning V winning number reaches the upper limit value and the opening end condition of the small winning is established, and when the small winning opening control timer times out in S432, the opening end condition of the small winning is established due to the end of the opening control of the small winning. In these cases, the CPU 103 controls the solenoid 22 to operate the movable part 872 to the closed state and closes the operating port of the V-judgment winning device 87 (S441). When the count value of the V-judgment winning number counter becomes "0", even if the V-judgment winning device 87 is in the middle of opening according to the opening mode of the small winning, the V-judgment winning device 87 is forcibly closed according to the count value of the V-judgment winning number counter.
When the small win opening control timer times out, the V-judgment winning device 87 is closed in response to the end of the small win opening control in the small win opening mode.

Next, data corresponding to the specific period that is the V winning valid period after the V determination winning device 87 is closed is set in the V winning valid period timer (S442), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small win end processing (S120) (S443), and the processing is terminated. This starts the timing of the specific period that is the V winning valid period after the V determination winning device 87 is closed.
In addition, by setting the specific period as the V winning valid period, even if the game ball passes through the V winning area later than the time it normally passes, the game ball can be detected. Also, since the specific period is set, even if someone tries to make a game ball win the V winning area illegally, only that period is detected, so that illegality can be prevented.

Figure 8-11 is a flowchart showing the small win end processing (S120) in the special pattern process processing. In the small win end processing, the CPU 103 updates the V winning validity period timer by subtracting 1 (S441) and checks whether the V winning validity period timer has timed out (timer value = 0) (S442).

When the V winning validity period timer has not timed out in S442, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag, which is set in S434 or S445 when a V winning has already been detected, is set (S443). If the V winning flag is set, the process is terminated. On the other hand, if the V winning flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the V winning switch 87a is in the on state in order to determine whether or not a V winning has been detected, which occurs when a game ball enters the V winning area 870 during the V winning validity period (S444). If it is not in the on state in S444, the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is in the on state in S444, it is when a V winning is detected during the V winning validity period, and the V winning flag indicating that a V winning has been detected is set (S445). Then, the process is performed to transmit a V winning designation command (S446), and the process is terminated. This allows the performance control CPU 120 to recognize that a V winning has occurred.

When the V winning validity period timer has timed out in S442, processing is performed to send a small win end command (S447). This allows the performance control CPU 120 to recognize that the small win has ended. Next, by changing the state of the solenoid 22, control is performed to open the opening and closing member and return the V winning area 870 (V winning port) to an open state (S447A). Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the V winning flag is set (S448). If the V winning flag is set in S448, it is determined that a big win has occurred, and the big win flag is set (S449).

As mentioned above, in the small win game state, if you hit to the right in response to the right hit promotion notification described below, you can make the game ball enter the V-determination winning device 87 with a probability of approximately 100%, and the game ball that enters the V-determination winning device 87 will always V-enter the V-winning area 870, and the V-winning flag will be set with a probability of approximately 100% (S435 in Figure 8-10). Based on this, the big win flag is set in S449, and the game is controlled to the big win game state.

Next, the CPU 103 formally stores the data indicating the type of jackpot via a small jackpot stored in the temporary jackpot type buffer in S81 in the jackpot type buffer in response to the determination that a proper jackpot has occurred due to the occurrence of a V win (S450). Then, the time-saving flag that was set at that time is temporarily reset (S451).

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot start 3 command, a jackpot start 4 command, or a jackpot start 5 command according to the jackpot type corresponding to the data stored in S450 (S452). This allows the performance control CPU 120 to recognize that a jackpot game state is about to start. Next, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (the time during which the occurrence of a jackpot is notified, for example, on the image display device 5) is set in the jackpot entry port control timer (S453).

The jackpot opening pattern data stored in ROM 101 is also referenced, and opening pattern data indicating the opening mode, such as the number of openings (for example, 15 times, 8 times, or 4 times), opening time (for example, 29 seconds), and interval time (time for closing the large prize opening between rounds), depending on the type of jackpot, is set in a predetermined memory area formed in RAM 102 (S454). Of such data, the data on the number of openings is set in an opening counter for counting the number of openings. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (S114) (S455), and the process ends. As a result, when a V win occurs in the small jackpot game state, the game state transitions to the jackpot game state.

If the V winning flag is not set in S448, the big win game state does not occur, so the data indicating the big win type via small win stored in the temporary big win type buffer in S81 is erased (S456), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the normal special symbol processing (S110) (S457), and the process ends. As a result, if a V winning does not occur in the small win game state, the game does not transition to the big win game state.

[Explanation of Feature 09TM]
Next, the characteristic portion 09TM will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-1 to 9-28.
In this embodiment, when controlled to a low base state (normal state), in a variable display where the display result is a "jackpot", a combination of decorative symbols for a jackpot (for example, "333") can be displayed as a combination of decorative symbols to be stopped.
In addition, in this embodiment, when controlled to a high base state (time-saving state), in the variable display where the display result is a "small win", a combination of decorative patterns for a small win (such as "3V3") can be displayed as a combination of decorative patterns to be stopped.
In addition, in this embodiment, when controlled to a high base state (time-saving state), when a variable display is executed in which the display result is a "small hit," and the game medium (game ball) does not enter the V winning area during small hit play, and is controlled to a low base state (normal state), a combination of decorative patterns for a jackpot (such as "333") can be displayed as the combination of decorative patterns to be stopped and displayed.

[Board composition]
FIG. 9-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment.
As shown in Fig. 9-1, when the small win shown in Fig. 8-1 occurs, the device is used to determine the V-entry of the game ball, which is a condition for generating a big win. The V-judgment winning device 87 is made of a transparent material, and is a device through which the game ball can be seen passing through. The V-judgment winning device LED 87L is provided in the V-judgment winning device 87, and is configured to be able to execute a promotion blinking effect in which the V-entry judgment device LED 87L blinks (lights up) at a predetermined timing (in this example, during the promotion effect for the small win game). Note that the explanation of the same parts as in Fig. 8-1 is omitted.

In this embodiment, multiple different types of promotion flashing effects are provided. For example, there is a first promotion flashing effect in which the V winning determination device LED87L flashes rainbow colors at a flashing cycle of 0.5 seconds, and a second promotion flashing effect in which the V winning determination device LED87L flashes red at a flashing cycle of 2 seconds (see Figures 9-14 and 9-15 described below).

[Jackpot type table]
FIG. 9-2 is a diagram showing a jackpot type table. In the jackpot type table, for each type of jackpot, the jackpot occurrence condition, the control state (game state) after the jackpot, the number of openings (number of rounds) in the jackpot, the opening time of each round in the jackpot, the jackpot ending period (hereinafter referred to as the "jackpot ED period" as appropriate), and the small jackpot ending period (hereinafter referred to as the "small jackpot ED period" as appropriate). In this embodiment, the jackpot types are a 10R time-saving jackpot with a pattern, a 3R time-saving jackpot with a pattern, a 11 (10)R time-saving jackpot via a small jackpot, a 6 (5)R time-saving jackpot via a small jackpot, and a 4 (3)R time-saving jackpot via a small jackpot. The parentheses in the jackpot via a small jackpot indicate the number of times the special variable winning ball device 7 opens.

A small win occurs when a game ball enters the second start winning hole provided in the variable winning ball device 6B and the display result of the second special symbol becomes a small win symbol. The determination of whether the display result of the special symbol is a small win symbol or not is made in advance by random number lottery (special symbol small win determination).
When a small win occurs, the game enters a small win game state, and the operation port of the V-judgment winning device 87 opens in an opening pattern of 10 openings and an opening time of 0.1 seconds. The game control state (the probability of a big win, the probability of a small win, and the base, which will be described later) after the end of the small win game state is the same as before the small win.
In the case of a small win, a prize ball is paid out for a game ball that has won a V winning area 870 in a V-determining winning device 87 during a small win game state. During a small win game state, it is set that about 10 winning balls can be generated, and it is set that prize balls can be paid out according to the winning balls.

When a game ball is placed in the operating port of the V-determination winning device 87 while the operating port is open, and the game ball enters the V-winning area 870 inside the V-determination winning device 87 (V-winning), a jackpot occurs. Such a jackpot that occurs via a small win is called a jackpot via a small win. Jackpots via a small win include "11 (10) R time-saving jackpot via small win", "6 (5) R time-saving jackpot via small win", and "4 (3) R time-saving jackpot via small win", which have different numbers of rounds in the jackpot.

In this example, the small hit that is linked to potentially become an "11 (10) R time-saving big hit" is called the "first small hit." The small hit that is linked to potentially become a "6 (5) R time-saving big hit" is called the "second small hit." The small hit that is linked to potentially become a "4 (3) R time-saving big hit" is called the "third small hit."

On the other hand, a jackpot that occurs directly from the variable display of a special symbol, without going through a small jackpot, is called a pattern jackpot. Pattern jackpots include the "Pattern 10R Time-Shortened Jackpot" and the "Pattern 3R Time-Shortened Jackpot," which occur directly based on the variable display of the first or second special symbol.

In this way, jackpots include pattern jackpots that occur directly based on the varying display of the first or second special pattern, and small jackpots that occur by V entry via a small jackpot based on the varying display of the second special pattern. Each pattern jackpot and small jackpot is a jackpot that is controlled to a time-saving state after the jackpot game state ends, and is called a time-saving jackpot. In this embodiment, the advantageous state that is advantageous to the player also includes the opening of the special variable winning ball device 7.

A 10R time-saving jackpot is a jackpot in which the large prize opening is opened 10 times (10R). A 3R time-saving jackpot is a jackpot in which the large prize opening is opened 3 times (3R). An 11 (10)R time-saving jackpot via small jackpot is a jackpot in which the V-determining winning device 87 is opened once (0.1 seconds x 10 times), and then the large prize opening is opened 10 times (10R) on the condition of a V winning. Although the winning device is opened for 11 rounds, the large prize opening is actually opened 10 times, and the player feels that the opening of the large prize opening is the same type of jackpot as a 10R time-saving jackpot. The 6(5)R time-saving jackpot via small win is a jackpot in which the V-determined winning device 87 opens (0.1 seconds x 10 times) and then the large winning hole opens five times (5R) on condition that a V win is won. The 4(3)R time-saving jackpot via small win is a jackpot in which the V-determined winning device 87 opens once (0.1 seconds x 10 times) and then the large winning hole opens three times (3R) on condition that a V win is won. The winning device opens for four rounds, but the large winning hole is actually opened three times, and the player feels that the opening of the large winning hole is the same type of jackpot as the 3R time-saving jackpot with regard to the pattern.

The time-saving state after the 3R time-saving jackpot has two end conditions: one in which the second special symbol is displayed once, and another in which the first and second special symbols are displayed five times in total (not shown). The number of times for the time-saving end condition in which the second special symbol is displayed once is set in consideration of the fact that the game ball that entered the V-judgment winning device 87 enters the V-winning area 870 at a 100% rate. When the second special symbol is displayed once, a small win occurs at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the end condition in which the second special symbol is displayed once is set as the number of times that a jackpot via a small win may occur when the second special symbol is displayed once.

The number of times the second special symbol is displayed once as the time-saving end condition is set for the following reason. In the case of a 3R time-saving jackpot, the time-saving state (including the electric support state) is basically continued until the second special symbol is displayed once, but to display the second special symbol, it is necessary to hit the ball from the right to make the ball enter the passage gate 41 and open the variable winning ball device 6B, and in that state, the ball must enter the variable winning ball device 6B. It may take time to make the ball enter the variable winning ball device 6B, and the first special symbol that has been reserved and stored may be displayed first.

Therefore, the end condition of the total number of times the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed five times is a condition for ensuring that one display of the second special symbol, which is likely to be determined as a jackpot advantageous to the player, can be executed even if the display of the first special symbol is started based on the reserved memory based on the first start winning of which up to four can be stored before the jackpot game state immediately after the start of the time-saving state and before the condition for starting the display of the second special symbol is met. In this way, it is possible to prevent the display of the second special symbol, which is likely to be determined as a jackpot advantageous to the player, from not being executed in the time-saving state, due to the display of the first special symbol is started based on the reserved memory based on the first start winning immediately after the start of the time-saving state.

In addition, after the jackpot of the 10R time-saving jackpot and part of the 11 (10)R time-saving jackpot via small jackpot, two end states are set: an end condition in which the number of times the second special symbol changes is 99 times, and an end condition (not shown) in which the total number of times the first special symbol and the second special symbol change is 103 times. The number of times of 99 times as the end condition of the time-saving state is set considering that the game ball that entered the V-judgment winning device 87 enters the V-winning area 870 at a rate of 100%. In the variable display of the second special symbol, a small jackpot occurs at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the end condition of the number of times of 99 times of the variable display of the second special symbol is a state in which the next jackpot via small jackpot is substantially confirmed when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and is set to a number of times that significantly increases the possibility of generating a jackpot via small jackpot compared to the 3R time-saving jackpot of the pattern. This allows players to focus on the occurrence of a big win via a small win, and also increases the player's sense of anticipation regarding the occurrence of a big win via a small win.

The end condition of the total number of times the first and second special symbols have been displayed is 103 times, for the same reason as in the case of the 3R time-saving jackpot. This is to ensure that the display of the 99 changes in the second special symbol, which is likely to be determined as a jackpot advantageous to the player, can be executed even if the display of the first special symbol starts due to reserved memory based on the first start winning (up to four can be stored) before the jackpot game state begins and before the condition for starting the display of the second special symbol is met immediately after the start of the time-saving state.

In addition, after a part of the 11 (10) R time-saving jackpot via small win, the 6 (5) R time-saving jackpot via small win, and the 4 (3) R time-saving jackpot via small win, two end states are set: an end condition in which the number of times the second special symbol is displayed is 7, and an end condition (not shown) in which the total number of times the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed is 11. The number of times 7, which is the end condition of the time-saving state, is set in consideration of the fact that the game ball that entered the V-judgment winning device 87 enters the V-winning area 870 at a rate of 100%. In the variable display of the second special symbol, a small win occurs at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the end condition in which the number of times the second special symbol is displayed is 7, is set as the number of times that the possibility of generating a jackpot via a small win is significantly higher when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, compared to the pattern 3R time-saving jackpot. This allows players to focus on the occurrence of a big win via a small win, and also increases the player's sense of anticipation regarding the occurrence of a big win via a small win.

The end condition of the total number of times the first and second special symbols are displayed is 11 times, for the same reason as in the case of the 3R time-saving jackpot. This is to ensure that the display of the seven changes in the second special symbol, which is likely to be determined as a jackpot advantageous to the player, can be executed even if the display of the first special symbol is started due to reserved memory based on the first start winning (up to four can be stored) before the jackpot game state begins and before the condition for starting the display of the second special symbol is met immediately after the start of the time-saving state.

The jackpot ending period for the 3R pattern time-saving jackpot and the 10R pattern time-saving jackpot (hereinafter referred to as the "jackpot ED period") is set to 10 seconds. During this 10-second jackpot ED period, it is possible to execute an entry effect that suggests the presentation mode that will be controlled after the jackpot.

The small win ending period (hereinafter referred to as the "small win ED period") for the 11 (10) R time-limited jackpot via small win, the 6 (5) R time-limited jackpot via small win, and the 4 (3) R time-limited jackpot via small win is set to 5 seconds, and the jackpot ED period is set to 10 seconds. During this 5-second small win ED period, it is possible to execute a jackpot type notification effect that notifies the type of jackpot, or a result display that shows information related to the number of jackpots and the total number of awarded prize balls, and during the 10-second jackpot ED period, it is possible to execute an entry effect that suggests the presentation mode that will be controlled after the jackpot.

In this embodiment, in the low base state, which is the normal state, the first start winning port is set so that winning can be made from the first path, so that the game ball flowing down the first path is more advantageous to the player in terms of starting winning than the game ball flowing down the second path. On the other hand, in an advantageous state such as a big win game state, the special variable winning ball device 7 that opens is set so that winning can be made from the second path, so that the game ball flowing down the second path is more advantageous to the player in terms of winning at the time of a big win than the game ball flowing down the first path. Also, in a special state such as a small win game state, the V-determined winning device 87 that opens is set so that winning can be made from the second path, so that the game ball flowing down the second path is more advantageous to the player in terms of the occurrence of a big win than the game ball flowing down the first path.

In addition to the above comparison of advantages, for example, other winning ports (for example, other variable winning ports (which may be for starting winning or non-starting winning)) may be provided on the first and second paths, and in the normal low base state, the first path is more likely to result in a winning entry into the variable winning port than the second path, and in other states such as the high base state, big win game state, and small win game state, the second path is more likely to result in a winning entry into the variable winning port than the first path. From other perspectives, a configuration may be adopted in which it is more advantageous for the player if the gaming medium flows down the first path in the normal state, and more advantageous for the player if the gaming medium flows down the second path in other game states.

[Random value]
FIG. 9-3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the main board 11 side.
As shown in FIG. 9-3, in this embodiment, on the main board 11 side, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, the random number value MR4 for determining the normal chart display result, and the random number value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to enhance the game effect, random number values other than these may be used. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by updating by software using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built into the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called game random numbers.

In this embodiment, the random numbers MR1 to MR5 are set to the ranges shown in FIG. 9-3, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the ranges of the random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be varied depending on the settings set in the pachinko game machine 1.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101 and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The CPU 103 also executes a random number generation program to generate all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11.

The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores not only the game control program but also various table data used to control the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of judgment tables prepared for the CPU 103 to make various judgments and decisions. The ROM 101 also stores table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variable pattern table that stores a plurality of types of variable patterns that become the variable display mode of each pattern in the variable display of special patterns, normal patterns, etc.

[Display result judgment table]
9-4 (A1) and (A2) are explanatory diagrams showing a display result determination table for the first special symbol and a display result determination table for the second special symbol. These tables are stored in the ROM 101.

9-4 (A1) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table for the first special symbol (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as the "display result determination table for the first special symbol"). The display result determination table for the first special symbol is a data table for determining a jackpot for the first special symbol, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 is set.
The "probability" shown in Figure 9-4 (A1) indicates the probability (percentage) of hitting the jackpot.
In this example, the probability of winning the first special symbol is 1/199.

Figure 9-4 (A2) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result judgment table for the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as the "display result judgment table [for second special symbol]" where appropriate). The display result judgment table [for second special symbol] is a data table for making big hit and small hit judgments for the second special symbol, and is a table in which a big hit judgment value and a small hit judgment value are set to be compared with the random number value MR1. In Figure 9-4 (A2), the upper row is the big hit judgment table section, and the lower row is the small hit judgment table section. The "probability" shown in the upper row indicates the probability (percentage) of a big hit, and the "probability" shown in the lower row indicates the probability (percentage) of a small hit.

In this example, the probability of a big win with the second special symbol is 1/199. The probability of a small win with the second special symbol is set to 1/7.35. A small win may also be set for the first special symbol. In such a case, it is desirable to set the probability of a small win with the first special symbol lower than that with the second special symbol. For example, the probability of a small win with the first special symbol may be set to 1/100.

When the CPU 103 detects a start winning entry into the first start winning entry port (first start winning entry) or a start winning entry into the second start winning entry port (second start winning entry), it extracts the count value (random number value MR1) of the random number circuit 124 at a predetermined timing. For the first start winning entry, the extracted value is compared with the jackpot determination value set in the display result determination table for the first special symbol, and if the extracted value matches any of the jackpot determination values, it is determined that a jackpot has been determined for the first special symbol. For the second start winning entry, the extracted value is compared with the jackpot determination value set in the display result determination table for the second special symbol, and if the extracted value matches any of the jackpot determination values, it is determined that a jackpot has been determined for the second special symbol. Then, if the extracted value does not match any of the big win determination values, the extracted value is compared with the small win determination value set in the [second special symbol] display result determination table, and if the extracted value matches any of the small win determination values, it is decided that the second special symbol will be a small win. Deciding to make it a small win also means provisionally deciding to make it a big win via a small win (it is written as provisionally decided because if no V win occurs during the small win, it will not be controlled as a big win).

Deciding whether to get a big win or not means deciding whether to transition to a big win game state, but also deciding whether to make the stopped pattern resulting from the variable display of the first special pattern or the second special pattern the big win pattern. Deciding whether to get a small win or not means deciding whether to transition to a small win game state, but also deciding whether to make the stopped pattern resulting from the variable display of the second special pattern the small win pattern.

[Big hit type determination table]
9-4(B1), (B2-1), and (B2-2) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. 9-4(B1) is a jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol used to determine the jackpot type of the pattern jackpot when the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot by the first special symbol. FIG. 9-4(B2-1) is a jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol used to determine the jackpot type of the pattern jackpot when the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot by the second special symbol. FIG. 9-4(B2-2) is a small jackpot via jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol used to determine the jackpot type of the small jackpot via jackpot when the small jackpot is determined to be a small jackpot by the second special symbol.

The jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol in Figure 9-4 (B1) (hereinafter referred to as the "jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol") contains a value to be compared with the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination, and jackpot determination values corresponding to a "10R pattern time-saving jackpot" and a "3R pattern time-saving jackpot" are set.

Figure 9-4 (B1) also shows the number of time-saving controls executed after each jackpot corresponding to a "10R pattern time-saving jackpot" and a "3R pattern time-saving jackpot." A "10R pattern time-saving jackpot" has 99 time-saving controls, while a "3R pattern time-saving jackpot" has 1 time of time-saving control. Hereinafter, a 10R pattern time-saving jackpot with 99 time-saving controls will be appropriately referred to as a "10R pattern time-saving jackpot (99 times)," and a 3R pattern time-saving jackpot with 1 time of time-saving control will be appropriately referred to as a "3R pattern time-saving jackpot (1 time)."

In this example, in the jackpot type determination table for the [first special symbol], of the MR2 determination value range of 0 to 299, 0 to 2 are assigned to a "10R pattern time-saving jackpot" (3%), and 3 to 299 are assigned to a "3R pattern time-saving jackpot" (97%).

The jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol in Figure 9-4 (B2-1) (hereinafter referred to as the "jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol") contains a jackpot determination value that is compared with the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination and corresponds to a "10R pattern time-saving jackpot".

In this example, in the jackpot type determination table for the [second special symbol], of the MR2 determination value range of 0 to 299, 0 to 299 is assigned to the "10R time-limited jackpot" (100%).

The small win via jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol in Figure 9-4 (B2-2) (hereinafter referred to as the "small win via jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol") contains a value to be compared with the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination, and jackpot determination values corresponding to "small win via 11 (10) R time-saving jackpot", "small win via 6 (5) R time-saving jackpot", and "small win via 4 (3) R time-saving jackpot".

Figure 9-4 (B2-2) also shows the number of time-saving controls executed after each of the jackpots for the "11 (10) R time-saving jackpot via small jackpot", the "6 (5) R time-saving jackpot via small jackpot", and the "4 (3) R time-saving jackpot via small jackpot". The "11 (10) R time-saving jackpot via small jackpot" has 99 or 7 time-saving controls, the "6 (5) R time-saving jackpot via small jackpot" has 7 time-saving controls, and the "4 (3) R time-saving jackpot via small jackpot" has 7 time-saving controls. In the following explanation, an 11 (10) R time-saving jackpot via a small win with 99 time-saving controls will be appropriately referred to as an "11 (10) R time-saving jackpot via a small win (99 times)," an 11 (10) R time-saving jackpot via a small win with 7 time-saving controls will be appropriately referred to as an "11 (10) R time-saving jackpot via a small win (7 times)," a 6 (5) R time-saving jackpot via a small win with 7 time-saving controls will be appropriately referred to as a "6 (5) R time-saving jackpot via a small win (7 times)," and a 4 (3) R time-saving jackpot via a small win with 7 time-saving controls will be appropriately referred to as a "4 (3) R time-saving jackpot via a small win (7 times)."

In this example, in the [second special symbol] small win via jackpot type judgment table, of the MR2 judgment value range 0-299, 0-29 is assigned to "small win via 11 (10) R time-saving jackpot (99 times)" (10%), 30-149 is assigned to "small win via 11 (10) R time-saving jackpot (7 times)" (40%), 150-164 is assigned to "small win via 6 (5) R time-saving jackpot (7 times)" (5%), and 165-299 is assigned to "small win via 4 (3) R time-saving jackpot (7 times)" (45%).

[Fluctuation pattern determination]
ROM 101 also stores a fluctuation pattern determination table for determining a fluctuation pattern based on a random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the multiple types of fluctuation patterns described above depending on the pre-determination result.

Here, we will explain the fluctuation pattern determination during the Hyper Rush mode (see Figure 9-6) described later. Specifically, two fluctuation pattern determination tables are prepared in advance: a [miss] fluctuation pattern determination table that is used when it is pre-determined that the fluctuation display result will be a "miss," and a [big hit/small hit] fluctuation pattern determination table that is used when it is pre-determined that the fluctuation display result will be a "big hit" or a "small hit."

[For misses] In the fluctuation pattern determination table, a predetermined random number value within the possible range of the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is assigned as a determination value for the fluctuation pattern of "shortened fluctuation miss", the fluctuation pattern of "shortened normal reach miss", and the fluctuation pattern of "ultra-shortened fluctuation miss".

In the fluctuation pattern judgment table [for big hits/small hits], a predetermined random number value within the possible range of the random number value MR3 for judging the fluctuation pattern is assigned as the judgment value for the fluctuation pattern of "shortened normal reach big hit/small hit" and the fluctuation pattern of "ultra-shortened variable big hit/small hit".

In this embodiment, the jackpot includes a pattern jackpot that occurs directly based on the variable display of the first or second special pattern, and a small jackpot via small jackpot that occurs by V entry via a small jackpot based on the variable display of the second special pattern, so a common variable pattern is used when the display result is a "jackpot" and when the display result is a "small jackpot." However, it is not limited to this form, and different variable patterns may be used when the display result is a "jackpot" and when the display result is a "small jackpot."

In this embodiment, in a variation pattern in which the final display result is a "miss" (such as a "shortened variation miss" or "ultra-shortened variation miss"), the reach state is not established and a notification is issued that the final display result is a "miss".

In this embodiment, the variation pattern of the "shortened variation miss" is a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the display result being "miss" (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as a "decorative symbol miss combination").
For example, "245", "143", etc. are displayed (statically and then fixed), thereby informing the user that the final display result is a "miss". The time for the variation is set to 2 seconds.

In addition, the "ultra-short miss" variation pattern executes a result display that shows information related to the number of jackpots and the total number of prize balls awarded, and displays (stops to be confirmed) a combination of small symbols that corresponds to the display result being a "miss" (hereinafter referred to as a "miss combination of small symbols" as appropriate; for example, "245", "143", etc.), thereby announcing that the final display result is a "miss". The variation time at this time is set to one second.

In this embodiment, among the variation patterns in which the final display result is a "miss", in the variation pattern of "shortened normal reach miss", after the reach state is established, a miss combination of decorative symbols (e.g., "323", "545", etc.) corresponding to the display result being a "miss" is displayed at a predetermined trigger (operation of push button 31B, passage of a predetermined period of time, etc.), thereby notifying the user that the final display result is a "miss". The variation time at this time is set to 10 seconds.

In this embodiment, the "decorative pattern losing combination" is set to a "first decorative pattern losing combination" that does not result in a reach state, and a "second decorative pattern losing combination" that results in a reach state. The "decorative pattern losing combination" is displayed when the variation pattern is a "shortened variation losing" or "ultra-shortened variation losing", and the "decorative pattern losing combination" is displayed when the variation pattern is a "shortened normal reach losing".

In this example, the "first losing combination of decorative symbols" is a combination of decorative symbols that does not result in a reach state, and the types of decorative symbols (characters and number symbols (English letter symbols)) are all mixed up. However, in this example, the "first losing combination of decorative symbols" is a combination of decorative symbols excluding "135", which is a "special combination of decorative symbols" described below, and "123", which is an "initial combination of decorative symbols" described below.

In this embodiment, among the variation patterns in which the final display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit", in the "short normal reach big hit/small hit" variation pattern, after the reach state is established, a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the display result being a "big hit" or a "small hit" is displayed at a predetermined opportunity (such as the operation of push button 31B or the passage of a predetermined period of time), thereby announcing that the final display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". (Hereinafter, a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the display result being a "big hit" will be appropriately referred to as a "decorative symbol combination for a big hit", and a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the display result being a "small hit" will be appropriately referred to as a "decorative symbol combination for a small hit".) The variation time at this time is set to 15 seconds.

In this embodiment, a "decorative pattern combination for a big win" is a combination of common decorative patterns including numbers that are stopped and displayed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. For example, "333" or "444". Also, a "decorative pattern combination for a small win" is a combination of a common decorative pattern including numbers that are stopped and displayed in the pattern display areas 5L and 5R, and a decorative pattern that corresponds to a "small win" display result that is stopped and displayed in the pattern display area 5C. For example, "3V3" or "4V4".

In this embodiment, in the "ultra-short variable jackpot/small jackpot" variation pattern among the variation patterns in which the final display result is a "jackpot" or a "small jackpot", a result presentation is executed to display a result display showing information related to the number of jackpots and the total number of prize balls awarded, and a revival presentation is executed in which a shooting star is displayed in the result display, and the display result is a "jackpot" or a "small jackpot" and a combination of small symbols corresponding to the corresponding combination is displayed (confirmed and stopped), thereby announcing that the final display result is a "jackpot" or a "small jackpot". The variation time in this case is set to 10 seconds.

Figure 9-5(A) (Figures 9-5(A1) and (A2)) is a fluctuation pattern determination table for the 1st to 99th spins of the time-saving feature in Hyper Rush mode, and Figure 9-5(B) (Figures 9-5(B1) and (B2)) is a fluctuation pattern determination table for the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th remaining reserve spins in Hyper Rush mode.

<[Hyper Rush Mode Time-saving 1st to 99th Spins] Fluctuation Pattern Judgment Table>
As shown in Figure 9-5 (A1), in the fluctuation pattern judgment table for the 1st to 99th spins of the time-saving in Hyper Rush mode [for misses], of the MR3 judgment value range of 1 to 997, 1 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "shortened fluctuation miss", and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "shortened normal reach miss".

As shown in Figure 9-5 (A2), in the fluctuation pattern judgment table for [big hit/small hit] from the 1st to 99th spins of the time-saving in Hyper Rush mode, out of the range of judgment values of 1 to 997 for MR3, 1 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "reduced normal reach big hit/small hit".

<[Hyper Rush Mode Remaining Reserve 1st to 4th Spins] Fluctuation Pattern Judgment Table>
As shown in Figure 9-5 (B1), in the [miss] fluctuation pattern judgment table for the first to fourth remaining reserved spins in Hyper Rush mode, of the MR3 judgment value range of 1 to 997, 1 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of ``ultra-shortened fluctuation miss.''

As shown in Figure 9-5 (B2), in the fluctuation pattern judgment table for the [big hit/small hit] for the first to fourth remaining reserved spins in Hyper Rush mode, of the MR3 judgment value range of 1 to 997, 1 to 997 is assigned to the "ultra-short fluctuation big hit/small hit" fluctuation pattern.

[Normal performance mode]
When the presentation mode is the "normal mode", each presentation mode (sunny mode, cloudy mode, rainy mode) will be described in detail.

In this embodiment, when the rendering mode is the "normal mode", it can be controlled to a plurality of rendering modes. The plurality of rendering modes when the rendering mode is the "normal mode" include, for example, a "sunny mode", a "cloudy mode", a "rainy mode", and the like.
In the following description, the "sunny mode" when the rendering mode is the "normal mode" will be referred to as the "normal mode (sunny mode)" or simply as the "sunny mode" as appropriate. The same applies to the "cloudy mode" and the "rainy mode."

When the presentation mode is controlled to [normal mode (sunny mode)], the presentation control CPU 120 will display a "sunny background image" depicting a sunny landscape including the sun and mountains as the background image for the decorative pattern.

When the presentation mode is controlled to [normal mode (cloudy mode)], the presentation control CPU 120 will display a "cloudy background image" depicting a cloudy landscape as the background image for the decorative pattern.

When the presentation mode is controlled to [normal mode (rain mode)], the presentation control CPU 120 will display a "rainy background image" depicting a rainy landscape as the background image for the decorative pattern.

In this embodiment, when the presentation mode is [normal mode], any of the following methods can be applied as a method for switching between various presentation modes ([sunny mode], [cloudy mode], [rainy mode]).
(A) A method for changing the presentation mode at a specified number of rotations (B) A method for changing the presentation mode by the player's operation

(A) "Method of changing presentation mode at specified rotation speed" is a method in which, after being controlled to one presentation mode, a variable display of the specified rotation speed is executed, and then the presentation mode is changed to another presentation mode.
For example, when 30 varying displays have been executed after the presentation mode has been controlled to the "sunny mode," the presentation mode is controlled to either the "cloudy mode" or the "rainy mode."

(B) "Method of changing presentation mode by player operation" refers to a method in which, when controlled in one presentation mode, if an operation by the player is received on the operation unit at any timing, the presentation mode is changed to another presentation mode.
For example, when the presentation mode is controlled to the "sunny mode," if the player wishes to change the presentation mode, the presentation mode will be controlled to the presentation mode selected by the player (either the "cloudy mode" or the "rainy mode") by operating the push button 31B or the like.

In this embodiment, when the presentation mode described below is controlled from [Challenge Mode] or [Rush Mode] to [Normal Mode] (hereinafter referred to as "time-saving exit"), it is controlled to [Normal Mode (Sunny Mode)] among [Normal Mode], and thereafter, when the presentation mode is controlled to [Normal Mode], if the presentation mode can be switched, it is possible to switch to various presentation modes including [Normal Mode (Sunny Mode)] ([Normal Mode (Sunny Mode)], [Normal Mode (Cloudy Mode], [Normal Mode (Rainy Mode)]).

In other words, in this embodiment, the presentation mode controlled after the time-saving feature has finished is fixed to [normal mode (sunny mode)], and then, at a predetermined trigger (for example, the completion of 20 variable displays after the time-saving feature has finished), it becomes possible to switch presentation modes, and it is possible to switch between various presentation modes including [normal mode (sunny mode)] ([normal mode (sunny mode)], [normal mode (cloudy mode)], and [normal mode (rainy mode)]).

[Decorative designs, small designs]
The various performance symbols (decorative symbols, small symbols) in this embodiment will be explained in detail.

(Decorative design)
In this embodiment, in synchronization with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns as decorative identification information different from the special patterns are variably displayed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The decorative patterns in this embodiment are composed of characters, number patterns indicating numbers, etc., and alphabet patterns indicating alphabets, etc.

A decorative design including a character and a number design is, for example, a decorative design including the character "A" and the number "1," a decorative design including the character "B" and the number "2," a decorative design including the character "C" and the number "3," a decorative design including the character "D" and the number "4," a decorative design including the character "E" and the number "5," a decorative design including the character "F" and the number "6," a decorative design including the character "G" and the number "7," etc.

In addition, a decorative design that includes a character and an English letter design is, for example, a decorative design that includes the character "V" and the English letter "V."

(Small design)
In this embodiment, a pattern smaller than the decorative pattern displayed in the upper right part of the image display device 5, which indicates whether the special pattern is displayed variably or not and the display result of the special pattern, is called a small pattern. The variable display of the small pattern can be executed in parallel with the variable display of the special pattern, and the stop display of the small pattern can also be executed in parallel with the stop display of the special pattern. The area in the upper right part of the screen of the image display device 5 where the small pattern corresponding to the first special pattern is displayed variably and stopped is set to the small pattern display area 5l, the small pattern display area 5c, and the small pattern display area 5r from the left, and the area in the upper right part of the screen of the image display device 5 where the small pattern corresponding to the second special pattern is displayed variably and stopped is also common to the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r described above.

The small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r have a smaller display area than the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Therefore, the visibility of the small patterns is lower than the visibility of the decorative patterns.

[Active display, Hold display, Hold memory count]
In this embodiment, a first hold display area 09TM01E that displays the first hold memory number (0 to 4 first hold display 09TM01) is provided at the bottom left of the screen of the image display device 5, and a second hold display area 09TM02E that displays the second hold memory number (0 to 4 second hold display 09TM02) is provided at the bottom right of the screen of the image display device 5. Also, an active display area 09TM03E that displays an active display 09TM03, which is information corresponding to the variable display of the decorative pattern being executed and is also information corresponding to the variable display of the special pattern being executed, is provided at the bottom center of the screen of the image display device 5.

Furthermore, a first pending memory count display area 09TM05E that displays the first pending memory count is provided on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 (above the first pending display area 09TM01E), and a second pending memory count display area 09TM06E that displays the second pending memory count is provided on the right side of the screen of the image display device 5 (above the second pending display area 09TM02E).

Here, the first pending display area 09TM01E displays a number of objects (round images) corresponding to the first pending memory count, and the second pending display area 09TM02E displays a number of objects (round images) corresponding to the second pending memory count. In contrast, the first pending memory count display area 09TM05E displays the first pending memory count as a number, and the second pending memory count display area 09TM06E displays the second pending memory count as a number. The display range of objects in the first pending display area 09TM01E is wider than the display range of numbers in the first pending memory count display area 09TM05E, and the first pending memory count is displayed with higher visibility in the first pending display area 09TM01E than in the first pending memory count display area 09TM05E. In addition, the display range of objects in the second pending display area 09TM02E is wider than the display range of numbers in the second pending memory count display area 09TM06E, and the second pending memory count is displayed with higher visibility in the second pending display area 09TM02E than in the second pending memory count display area 09TM06E.

[Game flow]
Next, the game flow in this embodiment will be described. In this example, the game state is controlled to the normal state (low probability/low base state), the presentation mode when the first flag, the second flag, and the third flag described later are not set is set to [normal mode], the game state is controlled to either the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) or the normal state (low probability/low base state), the presentation mode when the first flag described later is set is set to [challenge mode], the game state is controlled to either the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) or the normal state (low probability/low base state), the presentation mode when the second flag described later is set is set to [rush mode], the game state is controlled to either the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) or the normal state (low probability/low base state), the presentation mode when the third flag described later is set is set to [hyper rush mode] (see FIG. 9-6).

In the example game flow shown in Figure 9-6, when a jackpot occurs in the presentation mode [normal mode], after the jackpot game state ends, the game is controlled to a time-saving state (low probability/high base state), and transitions to [Challenge mode] (time-saving 1 spin + reserved 4 spins) or [Hyper rush mode] (time-saving 99 spins + reserved 4 spins), and if a jackpot occurs, transitions to [Rush mode] (time-saving 7 spins + reserved 4 spins) or [Hyper rush mode] (time-saving 99 spins + reserved 4 spins), and transitions to [normal mode] if a jackpot does not occur.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-2, a "4 (3) R time-saving jackpot via small jackpot" is a jackpot in which the V-determining winning device 87 is opened one set number of times (0.1 seconds x 10 times, a total period equivalent to one round), and then the large winning port is opened three times (3R) on the condition that a V is won within that one set number of times. Although the winning device is opened for four rounds, the large winning port is actually opened three times, and the player recognizes this as the same type of jackpot as a 3R time-saving jackpot with regard to the opening of the large winning port. In addition, a "6 (5) R time-saving jackpot via small jackpot" is a jackpot in which the V-judging winning device 87 is opened one set number of times (0.1 seconds x 10 times, a total period equivalent to one round), and then the large winning port is opened five times (5R) on the condition that a V is won within that one set number of times.Although the winning device is opened for six rounds, the large winning port is actually opened five times, and the player recognizes the opening of the large winning port as the same type of jackpot as a jackpot equivalent to a 5R time-saving jackpot with respect to the pattern. In addition, the "11 (10)R time-saving jackpot via small jackpot" is a jackpot in which the V-determining winning device 87 is opened one set number of times (0.1 seconds x 10 times, a total period equivalent to one round), and then the large winning hole is opened 10 times (10R) on the condition that a V is won within that one set number of times. Although the winning device is opened for 11 rounds, the large winning hole is actually opened 10 times, and the player recognizes this as the same type of jackpot as the 10R time-saving jackpot with regard to the opening of the large winning hole.

Usually, players recognize the type of jackpot based on the actual number of times the big prize slot is opened (for example, the number of times a long opening of up to 29 seconds occurs), so in the following explanation, the jackpot types "3R time-saving jackpot" and "4 (3)R time-saving jackpot via small jackpot" will be referred to as "3R time-saving jackpot", and the jackpot types "10R time-saving jackpot" and "11 (10)R time-saving jackpot via small jackpot" will be referred to as "10R time-saving jackpot". Also, the jackpot type "6 (5)R time-saving jackpot via small jackpot" will be referred to as "5R time-saving jackpot".

(1) When the game state is controlled to the normal state (low probability/low base state) and the first flag described later, the second flag described later, and the third flag described later are not set, the presentation mode is set to [normal mode]. (1A) As a presentation example when the presentation mode is [normal mode (sunny mode)], a sunny background image is displayed on the image display device 5 as the background image for the decorative pattern, (1B) As a presentation example when the presentation mode is [normal mode (cloudy mode)], a cloudy background image is displayed on the image display device 5 as the background image for the decorative pattern, and (1C) As a presentation example when the presentation mode is [normal mode (rainy mode)], a rainy background image is displayed on the image display device 5 as the background image for the decorative pattern.

(2) In the state of (1) described above, when a variable display is executed that results in a "jackpot", the game is controlled to a jackpot game state. In this embodiment, the jackpot types for the first special symbol are a "3R pattern time-saving jackpot" and a "10R pattern time-saving jackpot", and (2A) as an example of a presentation when the jackpot type is a "3R pattern time-saving jackpot", the characters "FEVER" are displayed on the image display device 5 to notify that it is a 3R jackpot, and (2B) as an example of a presentation when the jackpot type is a "10R pattern time-saving jackpot", the characters "MAX FEVER" are displayed on the image display device 5 to notify that it is a 10R jackpot.

(3) When the jackpot ends in the case where the jackpot type in (2A) is a "3R pattern time-saving jackpot," the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation sets the presentation mode to [challenge mode] when (3A-I) the first flag is set, the game state is controlled to the time-saving state (low probability/high base state), and one variable display is executed, and when (3A-II) the first flag is set, the game state is controlled to the normal state (low probability/low base state), and a reserved memory (a variable display whose execution is reserved (maximum of four in this example)) corresponding to the start winning that occurred in (3A-I) is executed. As an example of a presentation when the presentation mode is [challenge mode], the words "rush challenge" are displayed on the image display device 5 to notify that the presentation mode will be switched to [challenge mode].

In state (3), when one variable display in the time-saving state in which all display results are "misses" and the pending memory (variable displays whose execution is pending (up to four in this example)) corresponding to the start winning that occurred at this time is executed, control is made to state (1). In this example, when controlled from state (3) to state (1), control is made to state (1A) (presentation mode is [normal mode (sunny mode)]).

Also, in state (3), if a small win break occurs (described later) and the number of remaining time-saving controls is 0, the state will be controlled to state (1). In this example, when controlled from state (3) to state (1), the state will be controlled to state (1A) (presentation mode is [normal mode (sunny mode)]).

(4) When a jackpot of the (6A) jackpot type "3R time-saving jackpot" or "5R time-saving jackpot" described below ends, or when a jackpot of the (6C) "10R time-saving jackpot" type "10R time-saving jackpot (7 times)" described below ends, the presentation control CPU 120 sets the presentation mode to "rush mode" when (4A-I) the second flag is set, the game state is controlled to the time-saving state (low probability/high base state), and 7 variable displays are executed, and when (4A-II) the second flag is set, the game state is controlled to the normal state (low probability/low base state), and a pending memory (variable display whose execution is pending (up to 4 in this example)) corresponding to the starting winning that occurred at (4A-I) is executed. As an example of a presentation when the presentation mode is [Rush Mode], the words "Battle Rush" are displayed on the image display device 5 to notify the player that the presentation mode will be transitioning to [Rush Mode].

In state (4), when seven variable displays in the time-saving state in which all display results are "misses" and the reserved memory (variable displays whose execution is reserved (up to four in this example)) corresponding to the start winning that occurred at this time are executed, control is made to state (1). In this example, when controlled from state (4) to state (1), control is made to state (1A) (presentation mode is [normal mode (sunny mode)]).

Also, if a small win break occurs in state (4) and the number of remaining time-saving controls is 0 at this time, control is made to state (1). In this example, when control is made from state (4) to state (1), control is made to state (1A) (presentation mode is [normal mode (sunny mode)]).

(5) When a jackpot of the above-mentioned (2B) jackpot type "10R time-saving jackpot" ends, or when a jackpot of the below-mentioned (6C) "10R time-saving jackpot" type "10R time-saving jackpot (99 times)" ends, the presentation control CPU 120 sets the presentation mode to [Hyper Rush mode] when (5B-I) the third flag is set, the game state is controlled to the time-saving state (low probability/high base state), and the variable display of 99 times (1st spin to 99th spin) is executed, or when (5B-II) the third flag is set, the game state is controlled to the normal state (low probability/low base state), and the pending memory (variable display whose execution is pending (up to 4 in this example)) corresponding to the starting winning that occurred at (5B-I) is executed. As an example of a presentation when the presentation mode is [Hyper Rush Mode], a caption including the word "HYPER" to notify the user that the presentation mode will be transitioning to [Hyper Rush Mode] and the word "Battle Rush" are displayed on the image display device 5.

In state (5), when 99 variable displays in the time-saving state in which all display results are "misses" and the reserved memory (variable displays whose execution is reserved (up to 4 in this example)) corresponding to the start winning that occurred at this time are executed, control is performed to state (1). However, in this embodiment in which a small win occurs with a probability of about 1/7 in the variable display of the second special pattern, state (5) in which the number of time-saving controls is 99 is essentially a state in which a big win via the next small win is confirmed when the variable display of the second special pattern is executed, so an example of control from state (5) to state (1) is not shown.

In addition, if a small win break occurs in state (5), the state will be controlled to state (1) regardless of the number of remaining time-saving controls at that time (see Figure 9-8 (B)). In this example, when controlled from state (5) to state (1), the state will be controlled to state (1A) (presentation mode is [normal mode (sunny mode)]).

(6) When the presentation mode is [Challenge Mode] (see (3)), when the presentation mode is [Rush Mode] (see (4)), or when the presentation mode is [Hyper Rush Mode] (see (5)), if the display result in any of the variable displays becomes "Big Win" or "Small Win", the game is controlled to a big win game state (including a big win game state via a small win). In this embodiment, the big win type of the second special pattern when the display result becomes "Big Win" is "Pattern 10R Time Shortening Big Win", and the big win type via the small win of the second special pattern when the display result becomes "Small Win" is "Small Win via 4 (3) R Time Shortening Big Win", "Small Win via 6 (5) R Time Shortening Big Win", and "Small Win via 11 (10) R Time Shortening Big Win".

As shown in FIG. 9-6, (6A) as an example of a presentation when the jackpot type is a "3R time-saving jackpot", the characters "FEVER" are displayed on the image display device 5 to notify that it is essentially a 3R jackpot, (6B) as an example of a presentation when the jackpot type is a "5R time-saving jackpot", the characters "BIG FEVER" are displayed on the image display device 5 to notify that it is essentially a 5R jackpot, and (6C) as an example of a presentation when the jackpot type is a "10R time-saving jackpot", the characters "MAX FEVER" are displayed on the image display device 5 to notify that it is essentially a 10R jackpot. At this time, of the jackpot types of "10R time-saving jackpot", "10R time-saving jackpot (99 times)" with a time-saving control count of 99 times and "10R time-saving jackpot (7 times)" with a time-saving control count of 7 times are set.

[First flag, second flag, third flag]
Next, the first flag, the second flag, and the third flag in this embodiment will be described. Fig. 9-7 is a time chart showing the control timing of the game state related to the first flag, the second flag, and the third flag.

When the game state is controlled to a normal state (low probability/low base state), a jackpot with a jackpot type of "3R time-shortened jackpot" occurs, and the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state.
When the game state is controlled to the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) after the end of the big win game state, the presentation control CPU 120 sets the first flag (at the timing of T1 shown in FIG. 9-7). At this time, the presentation control CPU 120 sets the presentation mode to the [challenge mode].

When the first variable display in which the display result is "miss" after the game state is controlled to the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) ends, the game state is controlled to the normal state (low probability/low base state) (timing T2 shown in FIG. 9-7). A variable display based on the reserved memory (variable display whose execution is reserved (maximum 4 in this example)) corresponding to the start winning that occurred during the period from T1 to T2 shown in FIG. 9-7 (the first variable display period of the rush challenge) is executed, and in any of the variable displays based on the reserved memory (maximum 4 in this example) during that period, if the jackpot type is "small jackpot via 4 (3) R time-saving jackpot" or "small jackpot via 6 (5) R time-saving jackpot", when the variable display ends, it is controlled to the jackpot game state (jackpot game state via small jackpot) (timing T3 shown in FIG. 9-7). At this time, the performance control CPU 120 ends the [challenge mode].

When the big win game state ends, the game state is controlled to a time-saving state (low probability/high base state), and the presentation control CPU 120 clears the first flag and sets the second flag (timing T4 shown in Figure 9-7). At this time, the presentation control CPU 120 sets the presentation mode to [Rush mode].

When the seven variable displays in which the display result is "miss" after the game state is controlled to the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) are completed, the game state is controlled to the normal state (low probability/low base state) (timing T5 shown in FIG. 9-7). A variable display based on the reserved memory (variable display whose execution is reserved (maximum 4 in this example)) corresponding to the start winning that occurred during the period from T4 to T5 shown in FIG. 9-7 (the first to seventh variable display period of the Battle Rush) is executed, and in any of the variable displays based on the reserved memory (maximum 4 in this example) during that period, if the jackpot type is "10R time-saving jackpot" or "11 (10)R time-saving jackpot via small jackpot (99 times)", when the variable display ends, it is controlled to the jackpot game state (jackpot game state via small jackpot) (timing T6 shown in FIG. 9-7). At this time, the performance control CPU 120 ends the [Rush mode].

When the big win game state ends, the game state is controlled to a time-saving state (low probability/high base state), and the presentation control CPU 120 clears the second flag and sets the third flag (timing T7 shown in Figure 9-7). At this time, the presentation control CPU 120 sets the presentation mode to [Hyper Rush Mode].

When the game state is controlled to the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) and 99 variable displays in which the display result is "miss" are completed, the game state is controlled to the normal state (low probability/low base state) (timing T8 shown in FIG. 9-7). Variable displays based on reserved memory (variable displays whose execution is reserved (maximum of 4 in this example)) corresponding to the start winning that occurred during the period from T7 to T8 shown in FIG. 9-7 (the 1st to 99th variable display period of Hyper Battle Rush) are executed, and if the display result is "miss" in all variable displays based on reserved memory (maximum of 4 in this example) during that period, when the variable displays end, the performance control CPU 120 erases the third flag (timing T9 shown in FIG. 9-7). At this time, the performance control CPU 120 ends [Hyper Battle Rush] and transitions to the performance mode of [Normal mode].

[Timing for erasing the first flag and the second flag]
In this embodiment, any one of the following (1) to (3) timings is set as the timing for erasing the first flag and the second flag. Note that the timings shown in (1) to (3) are merely examples of the timing for erasing the first flag and the second flag, and are not limited to these forms. Timings other than the timings shown in (1) to (3) may be set as the timing for erasing the first flag and the second flag.

(1) When the first and second flags are set, if the game state is not controlled to a big win game state in response to the variable display of the specified number of time-saving controls (1 time, 7 times) after being controlled to a time-saving state (low probability/high base state) (i.e., if the display result is a "miss" or the display result is a "small win" but a small win break occurs), and the number of reserved memories (variable displays whose execution is reserved (maximum of 4 in this example)) corresponding to the start winning that occurred during the period controlled to the time-saving state is 0, if the display result of the time-saving final variable display described below is a "miss", the flag is erased when this time-saving final variable display ends, and if the display result of the time-saving final variable display is a "small win", the flag is erased when a small win break occurs in the small win game state described below and the small win game state ends.

(2) When the first and second flags are set, if the game state is not controlled to a jackpot game state in response to the variable display of the specified number of time-saving controls (1 time, 7 times) after the game state has been controlled to a time-saving state (low probability/high base state) (i.e., the display result is a "miss" or the display result is a "small hit" but a small hit break has occurred), and the number of reserved memories corresponding to a start winning that occurred during the period controlled to the time-saving state is one or more, If the game is not controlled to a big win game state in response to all the variable displays based on the corresponding reserved memory (i.e., if the display result is a "miss" or the display result is a "small win" but a small win break occurs), if the display result of the variable display based on the last reserved memory is a "miss", it is erased when that variable display ends, and if the display result of the variable display based on the last reserved memory is a "small win", a small win break occurs in that small win game state and it is erased when the small win game state ends.

(3) When the first and second flags are set and the game is controlled to a jackpot game state, they are cleared when the jackpot game state ends.

[Timing for erasing the third flag] In this embodiment, the timing for erasing the third flag can be set to any one of the following (1) to (4). Note that the timings (1) to (4) are merely examples of the timing for erasing the third flag, and the timing is not limited to these forms.
Timings other than the timings (1) to (4) may be set as the timing for erasing the third flag.

(1) When the third flag is set, if all of the display results of the variable displays for the specified number of time-saving controls (99 times) since the game state was controlled to the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) are "misses," and the number of reserved memories corresponding to the start wins that occurred during the period controlled to the time-saving state is 0, the third flag is erased at the time when the final time-saving variable display ends.

(2) The third flag is erased when this flag is set and all of the variable displays for the specified number of time-saving controls (99 times) since the game state was controlled to the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) have a "miss" display result, when the number of reserved memories corresponding to start wins that occurred during the period controlled to the time-saving state is one or more, and when all of the variable displays based on the reserved memories corresponding to start wins that occurred during the period controlled to the time-saving state have a "miss" display result, at the time when the variable display based on the last reserved memory has ended.

(3) When the third flag is set, if the display result of either of the variable displays for the specified number of time-saving controls (99 times) after the game state is controlled to the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) or the variable display based on the reserved memory when there is one or more reserved memories corresponding to the start winnings that occurred during the period controlled to the time-saving state is a "small win," a small win break occurs in the small win game state, and the third flag is erased when the small win game state ends (see Figure 9-8 (B)).

(4) When the third flag is set and the game is controlled to a jackpot game state, the third flag is cleared when the jackpot game state ends.

[Small hit puncture]
In this embodiment, when a small win occurs and the operating port of the V-judgment winning device 87 is opened, if a game ball enters the V-winning area 870 and the V-winning switch 87a detects the game ball during a predetermined valid period, the conditions for a big win are met and the game is controlled to a big win game state. Such a game ball entering the V-winning area 870 is called a V-winning. However, when a small win occurs and the operating port of the V-judgment winning device 87 is opened, if a game ball does not enter the V-winning area 870 and the V-winning switch 87a does not detect the game ball during a predetermined valid period, the conditions for a big win are not met and the game is not controlled to a big win game state. In this way, a case where a game ball does not enter the V-winning area 870 during a small win game and a small win game ends without a V-winning is called a "small win break".

As shown in the explanation of Figure 8-1, if the remaining number of time-saving controls is 1 or more after the end of the small win game state when a small win break occurs (when a V win does not occur), the game will continue to be controlled to the time-saving state, and if the remaining number of time-saving controls is 0 after the end of the small win game state when a small win break occurs, the game will be controlled to the normal state. The following explanation will cover the case where the remaining number of time-saving controls is 1 or more after the end of the small win game state when a small win break occurs.

In this embodiment, it is possible to change the game state that is controlled after the end of the small win game state in which the small win puncture occurred, depending on the type of time-saving state immediately before control to the small win game state in which the small win puncture occurred.

In this example, (A) when the second flag is set (i.e., when the presentation mode is [Rush Mode]), if a small hit occurs while controlled in the time-saving state and a small hit break occurs in this small hit play state, if the remaining number of time-saving controls is 1 or more, the game will continue to be controlled to the time-saving state after the small hit play state ends. On the other hand, (B) when the third flag is set (i.e., when the presentation mode is [Hyper Rush Mode]), if a small hit occurs while controlled in the time-saving state and a small hit break occurs in this small hit play state, the game will be controlled to the normal state after the small hit play state ends, even if the remaining number of time-saving controls is 1 or more.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-6, when the first flag is set (i.e., when the presentation mode is [challenge mode]), the number of time-saving controls is 1, so the number of time-saving controls remaining after the end of the small win game state in which the small win puncture has occurred is 0, and the game state is controlled to the normal state without being controlled to the time-saving state. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. When the first flag is set (i.e., when the presentation mode is [challenge mode]), by adopting a configuration in which the number of time-saving controls is 2 or more, if the number of time-saving controls remaining after the end of the small win game state in which the small win puncture has occurred is 1 or more, the game state may continue to be controlled to the time-saving state after the end of the small win game.

Figure 9-8 is a time chart showing the control timing of the game state according to the type of time-saving state when a small hit break occurs. Figure 9-8 (A) is a time chart showing the control timing of the game state when a small hit break occurs in a small hit game that occurs while controlled in the time-saving state when the second flag is set (i.e., when the presentation mode is [Rush mode]). Figure 9-8 (B) is a time chart showing the control timing of the game state when a small hit break occurs in a small hit game that occurs while controlled in the time-saving state when the third flag is set (i.e., when the presentation mode is [Hyper Rush mode]). The following explanation will be given for the case when the remaining number of time-saving controls is 1 or more after the end of the small hit game state when a small hit break occurs.

As shown in FIG. 9-8(A), when the game state is controlled to a time-saving state (low probability/high base state) (when the presentation mode is controlled to [Rush mode] based on the second flag being set), a display showing a "small win" is executed in one of the variable displays, and when a small win occurs, the game state is controlled to a small win when the variable display ends (timing T1 shown in FIG. 9-8(A)). At this time, the presentation control CPU 120 ends [Rush mode].

When the small win game state ends without a V being won, that is, when a small win break occurs, the CPU 103 continues the game state and controls it to a time-saving state (low probability/high base state), and the presentation control CPU 120 continues to set the second flag without erasing it (timing T2 shown in Figure 9-8 (2)). At this time, the presentation control CPU 120 sets the presentation mode to [Rush mode] based on the fact that the second flag is set (not erased).

As shown in Figure 9-8 (B), when the game state is controlled to a time-saving state (low probability/high base state) (when the presentation mode is controlled to [Hyper Rush mode] based on the third flag being set), a variable display that displays a "small hit" is executed in any of the variable displays, and when a small hit occurs, when the variable display ends, the game state is controlled to a small hit (timing T1 shown in Figure 9-8 (B)).
At this time, the performance control CPU 120 ends the Hyper Rush Mode.

When the small win game state ends without a V being won, that is, when a small win break occurs, the game state is controlled to the normal state (low probability/low base state) and the presentation control CPU 120 erases the third flag (timing T2 shown in Figure 9-8 (B)). At this time, the presentation control CPU 120 sets the presentation mode to [normal mode] based on the fact that the third flag has been erased and none of the first flag to the third flag are set.

In this embodiment, in a small win game corresponding to a small win that occurs when the presentation mode is either [Challenge Mode] or [Rush Mode] (when either the first or second flag is set), when a small win break occurs, (A) if the number of remaining time-saving controls after the end of the small win game state is 1 or more, the presentation mode is controlled again to the presentation mode ([Challenge Mode], [Rush Mode]) that was controlled before the small win game until the variable display of the remaining number of time-saving controls is executed, and (B) if the number of remaining time-saving controls after the end of the small win game state is 0, the presentation mode is controlled to [Normal Mode].

For example, when the presentation mode is [Rush mode] and the time-saving state is controlled and a small win break occurs during the seventh variable display (when there are four variable displays on hold), after the small win ends, the presentation mode is controlled to [Normal mode (sunny mode)] and the four second special pattern variable displays on hold are executed.

At this time, the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 display a combination of decorative symbols for a big win that corresponds to the small win combination of decorative symbols that was stopped in the variable display when the previous small win occurred (see Figure 9-16), and the variable display of the small symbols that corresponds to the variable display of the second special symbols for the four times whose execution is pending is executed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a small win break occurs during a small win game corresponding to a small win that occurs when the presentation mode is [Hyper Rush Mode] (when the third flag is set), (C) the presentation mode is controlled to [Normal Mode] regardless of the number of remaining time-saving control times after the end of the small win game state.

For example, when the presentation mode is [Hyper Rush Mode], if a small win break occurs during the 10th variable display (when there are four variable displays on hold) while the time-saving state is being controlled, after the small win ends, the presentation mode will be controlled to [Normal Mode (Sunny Mode)] and the four variable displays of the second special pattern on hold will be executed.

At this time, the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 display a combination of decorative symbols for a big win that corresponds to the small win combination of decorative symbols that was stopped in the variable display when the previous small win occurred (see Figure 9-16), and the variable display of the small symbols that corresponds to the variable display of the second special symbols for the four times whose execution is pending is executed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r.

[Processing for determining effects at the start of fluctuation]
When the CPU 103 starts the varying display of the special pattern, it transmits a display result designation command that specifies the display result, a variation pattern designation command that specifies the variation pattern, and a reserved memory number subtraction designation command (first reserved memory number subtraction designation command or second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) to the performance control CPU 120.

When the display of the special pattern (first special pattern or second special pattern) begins, the presentation control CPU 120 is able to determine that the display of the special pattern will be performed and to specify the time to change the special pattern and the content of the presentation (reach, pseudo-consecutive, etc.) based on receiving from the game control microcomputer 100 a set of commands: a reserved memory number subtraction designation command (first reserved memory number subtraction designation command or second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) that specifies that the reserved memory number has been subtracted; a display result designation command that specifies the display result (jackpot, small win, or miss, the type of jackpot in the case of a jackpot, the type of jackpot in the case of a jackpot via a small win); and a change pattern designation command that specifies the time to change the special pattern and the content of the presentation (reach, pseudo-consecutive, etc.).

In addition, when the variable display of the special pattern has ended and the display result has been determined, the performance control CPU 120 is able to determine that the variable display of the special pattern (first special pattern or second special pattern) has ended and the display result has been derived based on receiving a pattern determination command from the game control microcomputer 100.

Figure 9-9 is a flowchart showing the effect determination process executed at the start of the change. The effect control CPU 120 executes the effect determination process at the start of the change shown in Figure 9-9 in the variable display start setting process (step S171) of the effect control process shown in Figure 7. Specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the above set of commands accompanying the start of the variable display of the special pattern, it sets an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute an effect) for executing the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the variable display of the special pattern based on the display result designation command and the variable pattern designation command, and determines the effect to be executed (and the effect not to be executed) during the variable display of the decorative pattern based on the designated variable pattern by the effect determination process at the start of the change shown in Figure 9-9.

First, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the first flag, the second flag, or the third flag is set (step S09TM1010).

If none of the first flag, second flag, or third flag is set (NO in step S09TM1010), the performance control CPU 120 proceeds to step S09TM1020 and subsequent steps. If none of the first flag, second flag, or third flag is set (NO in step S09TM1010), this means that the performance mode is controlled to [normal mode], so the processing from step S09TM1020 onwards is processing that is executed when the performance mode is controlled to [normal mode].

If any of the first, second, or third flags is set (YES in step S09TM1010), the performance control CPU 120 proceeds to step S09TM1060 and subsequent steps. If any of the first, second, or third flags is set (YES in step S09TM1010 means that the performance mode is controlled to either [challenge mode], [rush mode], or [hyper rush mode]), the processing from step S09TM1060 onwards is processing that is executed when the performance mode is controlled to either [challenge mode], [rush mode], or [hyper rush mode].

If none of the first, second, or third flags are set (NO in step S09TM1010), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the display result specified by the display result specification command (the display result of the variable display that will be executed) is a "jackpot" (step S09TM1020).

If the display result is a "jackpot" (YES in step S09TM1020), the performance control CPU 120 determines the combination of decorative symbols to be displayed when the variable display ends based on the decorative symbol jackpot combination determination table for the [first special symbol] described below (see Figure 9-10 (A)) (step S09TM1030).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 decides to execute the symbol stop motion performance described below and the symbol stop sound performance described below (see Figures 9-11) (step S09TM1040), and ends the process.

Also, if the display result is a "miss" (NO in step S09TM1020), the performance control CPU 120 determines the losing combination of decorative patterns to be displayed when the variable display ends based on a decorative pattern combination determination table (not shown) (step S09TM1050), and ends the process.

In this embodiment, a "decorative symbol losing combination" is a combination of decorative symbols that is different from any of the decorative symbol big win combinations (in this example, "333" and the like), the decorative symbol small win combinations (in this example, "3V3" and the like), and the special decorative symbol combinations described below (in this example, "135" and the like).

If any of the first, second, or third flags is set (YES in step S09TM1010), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the display result specified by the display result specification command (the display result of the variable display that will be executed) is either a "big win" or a "small win" (step S09TM1060).

If the display result is either a "big win" or a "small win" (YES in step S09TM1060), the performance control CPU 120 determines the combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed when the variable display ends based on the decorative symbol big win combination determination table for the [second special symbol] described below (see Figure 9-10 (B1)), or the decorative symbol big win (small win) combination determination table for the [second special symbol] described below (see Figure 9-10 (B2)) (step S09TM1070).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 decides to execute the symbol stop motion performance and symbol stop sound performance (see Figure 9-11) (step S09TM1080), and ends the processing.

Also, if the display result is a "miss" (NO in step S09TM1060), the performance control CPU 120 determines the combination of decorative symbols to be displayed as stopped when the variable display ends based on a miss combination determination table for decorative symbols (not shown) (step S09TM1090), and ends the process.

<Decoration design combination decision table>
9-10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a combination determination table for decorative symbols. As shown in FIG. 9-10, in this embodiment, a determination value is assigned so that the determination ratio of the combination of decorative symbols differs depending on the display result and the big win type corresponding to this display result.

([For the first special symbol] Combination determination table for the big win of the decorative symbol)
Figure 9-10 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a combination decision table for decorative pattern jackpots when the display result corresponding to the variable display of the first special pattern specified by the display result specification command is a "jackpot" and the jackpot type corresponding to this "jackpot" is either a "3R pattern time-saving jackpot" or a "10R pattern time-saving jackpot."

When the jackpot type is a "3R pattern time-saving jackpot," there is a 15% chance that the jackpot combination for the decorative patterns will be "111," and similarly, there is a 20% chance that it will be "222," a 10% chance that it will be "333," a 20% chance that it will be "444," a 15% chance that it will be "555," and a 20% chance that it will be "666."

When the jackpot type is a "10R pattern time-saving jackpot," the jackpot combination for the decorative patterns is determined to be "777" 100% of the time.

In this way, in this embodiment, when a jackpot combination of decorative symbols "111" to "666" is displayed, the player can recognize that the jackpot type is a "3R time-saving jackpot," and when a jackpot combination of decorative symbols "777" is displayed, the player can recognize that the jackpot type is a "10R time-saving jackpot." Therefore, when a jackpot combination of decorative symbols "777" is displayed, the player can recognize that the machine will be controlled to [Hyper Rush Mode] after the jackpot game.

([For the second special symbol] Combination determination table for the big win of the decorative symbol)
Figure 9-10 (B1) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a combination decision table for decorative pattern jackpots when the display result corresponding to the variable display of the second special pattern specified by the display result specification command is a "jackpot" and the jackpot type corresponding to this "jackpot" is a "10R pattern time-saving jackpot."

When the jackpot type is a "10R pattern time-saving jackpot," the jackpot combination for the decorative patterns is determined to be "777" 100% of the time.

([For the second special pattern] Combination determination table for big wins (small wins) of decorative patterns)
Figure 9-10 (B2) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a combination decision table for decorative patterns for a jackpot (for a small jackpot) when the display result corresponding to the variable display of the second special pattern specified by the display result specification command is a "small jackpot" and the jackpot type corresponding to this "small jackpot" is either a "11 (10) R time-shortened jackpot via small jackpot," a "6 (5) R time-shortened jackpot via small jackpot," or a "4 (3) R time-shortened jackpot via small jackpot."

When the jackpot type is "11 (10) R time-saving jackpot via small jackpot", there is a 10% chance that the jackpot combination for the decorative symbols will be "111" and the small jackpot combination for the decorative symbols will be "1V1", and similarly, there is a 10% chance that it will be "222" and "2V2", there is a 10% chance that it will be "333" and "3V3", there is a 10% chance that it will be "444" and "4V4", there is a 10% chance that it will be "555" and "5V5", there is a 10% chance that it will be "666" and "6V6", and there is a 40% chance that it will be "777" and "7V7".

When the jackpot type is "6(5)R time-saving jackpot via small jackpot", there is a 15% chance that the jackpot combination for the decorative symbols will be "111" and the small jackpot combination for the decorative symbols will be "1V1", and similarly, there is a 20% chance that it will be "222" and "2V2", there is a 10% chance that it will be "333" and "3V3", there is a 20% chance that it will be "444" and "4V4", there is a 15% chance that it will be "555" and "5V5", and there is a 20% chance that it will be "666" and "6V6".

When the jackpot type is "Small jackpot via 4(3)R time-saving jackpot", there is a 15% chance that the jackpot combination for the decorative symbols will be "111" and the small jackpot combination for the decorative symbols will be "1V1", and similarly, there is a 20% chance that it will be "222" and "2V2", there is a 10% chance that it will be "333" and "3V3", there is a 20% chance that it will be "444" and "4V4", there is a 15% chance that it will be "555" and "5V5", and there is a 20% chance that it will be "666" and "6V6".

In this embodiment, when determining a decorative symbol combination for a big win (small win), a "decorative symbol combination for a big win" is determined, and a "decorative symbol combination for a small win" that corresponds to this "decorative symbol combination for a big win" is also determined. In other words, the "decorative symbol combination for a big win" and the "decorative symbol combination for a small win" are determined at the same time.

In this way, by adopting a configuration in which the "decorative symbol combination for a big win" and the "decorative symbol combination for a small win" are determined in advance in a common process (step S09TM1070) at the timing when the fluctuation starts, in irregular situations such as when a small win break occurs, it is only necessary to display this previously determined combination of decorative symbols ("decorative symbol combination for a big win", "decorative symbol combination for a small win") at the specified timing, thereby reducing the processing burden on the presentation control.

Note that the configuration is not limited to determining the "decorative pattern combination for a big win" and the "decorative pattern combination for a small win" at the same time, but the "decorative pattern combination for a big win" and the "decorative pattern combination for a small win" may be determined separately. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the "decorative pattern combination for a big win" is determined first, and then the "decorative pattern combination for a small win" is determined, or a configuration may be adopted in which the "decorative pattern combination for a big win" is determined first, and then the "decorative pattern combination for a small win" is determined.

[Pattern stop motion effect, pattern stop sound effect]
In this embodiment, when the display result of the ongoing variable display is a "big hit" or a "small hit," the presentation control CPU 120 can execute a pattern stopping action presentation and a pattern stopping sound presentation to notify the player that the display result will be a "big hit" or a "small hit" at the timing when the decorative pattern should be stopped and displayed.

The pattern stop action effect is an effect that is executed when the display result of the variable display currently in progress is a "big hit" or a "small hit", and is an effect in which the decorative pattern (in this example, characters and number patterns or alphabet patterns) performs an action (in this example, enlargement or action) at the timing when the decorative pattern should be stopped and displayed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At the timing when the decorative pattern should be fixed and stopped (such as the timing when the pattern fix command is received), the pattern stop action effect ends, and the action of the decorative pattern also ends. In the pattern stop action effect, the decorative pattern takes an action to notify the player that the display result of the variable display currently in progress is a "big hit" or a "small hit", and can increase the excitement of the game.

The pattern stop sound effect is an effect that is executed when the display result of the variable display currently in progress is a "big hit" or a "small hit", and is an effect in which a pattern stop sound effect is played and output from the speakers 8L, 8R at the timing when the decorative pattern should be stopped and displayed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5. At the timing when the decorative pattern should be fixed and stopped (such as the timing when the pattern fix command is received), the pattern stop sound effect ends, and the playback output of the pattern stop sound effect from the speakers 8L, 8R also ends. In the pattern stop sound effect, the pattern stop sound effect is played and output from the speakers 8L, 8R to notify that the display result of the variable display currently in progress is a "big hit" or a "small hit", and to increase the excitement of the game.

In this embodiment, if the display result of the variable display in progress is a "miss," neither the symbol stop action effect nor the symbol stop sound effect is executed. At the timing when the decorative symbols should be stopped and displayed, the decorative symbols (in this example, the characters and number symbols or the alphabetic symbols) do not perform any action (enlargement, movement), and the symbol stop sound effect is not played or output from the speakers 8L, 8R, thereby informing the player that the display result of the variable display in progress is a "miss," and preventing the player from inadvertently inciting a sense of disappointment in the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the display result of the ongoing variable display is a "big win" or a "small win," neither the pattern stop action effect nor the pattern stop sound effect is executed at a timing other than the timing at which the decorative patterns should be stopped and displayed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5.

For example, in the timing when the decorative pattern corresponding to the display result of the variable display executed immediately before the big win game was "big win" or "small win" should be displayed until the first variable display is executed after the big win game, neither the pattern stop action effect nor the pattern stop sound effect is executed.

[Examples of symbol stop motion effects and symbol stop sound effects]
9 to 11 are explanatory diagrams showing the effect images displayed on the image display device 5 and the effect sounds reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R, which are related to the symbol stopping action effect and the symbol stopping sound effect.
9-11(1), (2A) and (3A) are explanatory diagrams showing the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 and the effect sound reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R when the symbol stop motion effect and the symbol stop sound effect are not executed. 9-11(1), (2B) and (3B) are explanatory diagrams showing the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 and the effect sound reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R when the symbol stop motion effect and the symbol stop sound effect are executed.

As shown in FIG. 9-11 (1), at the timing when the reach state in the variable pattern should be established, the performance control CPU 120 brings about the reach state by displaying decorative patterns including the character "C" and the number "3" frozen in the pattern display area 5L and pattern display area 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r continue to display the small patterns. That is, the small pattern display area 5l corresponding to the pattern display area 5L where the decorative pattern is frozen, and the small pattern display area 5r corresponding to the pattern display area 5R where the decorative pattern is frozen, continue to display the small patterns frozen without being frozen.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays an operation prompting display 09TM31B in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, urging the player to operate the push button 31B. Here, the operation prompting display 09TM31B is displayed with a higher priority than the decorative pattern and background image (it is displayed in a display layer higher than the panel image and is superimposed so that it appears to be closer to the player).

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays the active display 09TM03 corresponding to the currently executing variable display in the active display area 09TM03E. The performance control CPU 120 also displays "0" in the first pending memory count display area 09TM05E, and displays "0" in the second pending memory count display area 09TM06E.

<Example of a performance when the symbol stop motion performance and symbol stop sound performance are not executed>
Next, when it is decided not to execute the symbol stop action effect and the symbol stop sound effect at the start of the variation, as shown in Fig. 9-11 (2A), at a predetermined opportunity (such as the player's operation of the push button 31B, or the timing at which the decorative symbols in the variation pattern should be displayed), the CPU 120 for controlling the effect displays the combination of decorative symbols for which the display result is a "miss" (in this example, "323") in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. At this time, the display of the small symbols is being executed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-11 (3A), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the first special symbol, the performance control CPU 120, which has received the symbol determination command, determines and stops the final losing combination of decorative symbols (in this example, "323"). At this time, the small symbol combination (in this example, "323") is determined and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the active display 09TM03 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed is erased from the active display area 09TM03E.

<Example of the performance when executing the symbol stop motion performance and the symbol stop sound performance>
Next, when it is decided to execute the symbol stop action effect and the symbol stop sound effect at the start of the variation, as shown in FIG. 9-11 (2B), at a predetermined opportunity (such as the player's operation of the push button 31B, or the timing to stop and display the decorative symbols in the variation pattern), the effect control CPU 120 executes the symbol stop action effect, and in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the combination of decorative symbols that results in a "big win" is made to perform an action (in this example, the decorative symbols including the character "C" and the number "3" are enlarged and acted upon), a symbol stop sound effect is executed, and a symbol stop sound effect is played and output from the speakers 8L and 8R. At this time, the variable display of the small symbols is executed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-11 (3B), when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the first special symbol, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance, which has received the symbol determination command, ends the symbol stop action performance, ends the decorative symbol action in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, determines and stops the final decorative symbol combination for a big win (in this example, "333"), ends the symbol stop sound performance, and ends the playback output of the symbol stop sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R. At this time, the combination of small symbols (in this example, "333") is determined and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the active display 09TM03 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed is erased from the active display area 09TM03E.

[Small hit performance decision processing]
Fig. 9-12 is a flowchart showing the effect determination process executed during a small win. The effect control CPU 120 executes the small win effect determination process shown in Fig. 9-12 in the small win effect process (step S174) of the effect control process shown in Fig. 7. Specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a small win start designation command, it determines the effect to be executed during a small win (and the effect not to be executed) by the small win effect determination process shown in Fig. 9-12.

First, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not the first promotion performance described below or the second promotion performance described below is being executed (step S09TM2010). If either the first promotion performance or the second promotion performance is being executed (YES in step S09TM2010), the performance control CPU 120 ends the process.

If neither the first nor the second promotional performance is being executed (NO in step S09TM2010), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the power outage recovery flag described below is set (step S09TM2020).

In this embodiment, the "power outage recovery flag" is a type of flag that is set when the performance control CPU 120 receives a performance control command (such as a power outage recovery command in this example) that instructs recovery from the power outage shown in FIG. 3 (step S7). If the timing at which this "power outage recovery flag" is set is (1) when the variable display of the special pattern is being executed, it is erased when the variable display ends, and (2) if the timing is either when the variable display of the special pattern is not being executed, during a big win, or during a small win, it is erased when the next variable display starts.

If the power outage recovery flag is not set (NO in step S09TM2020), the performance control CPU 120 decides to execute the first promotion performance (step S09TM2030) and ends the processing.

If the power outage recovery flag is set (YES in step S09TM2020), the performance control CPU 120 decides to execute the second promotion performance (step S09TM2040) and ends the processing.

[Promotional performance]
In this embodiment, when a small win is being played, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a promotion performance that instructs a right hit to get a V win (a win in the V win area 870). The promotion performance includes at least one of the following: a promotion blinking performance that promotes a right hit to get a V win by blinking (illuminating) the V determination winning device LED 87L, a promotion sound effect performance that promotes a right hit to get a V win by playing and outputting a promotion sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a promotion image performance that promotes a right hit to get a V win by displaying a promotion image on the image display device 5.

In this embodiment, a first promotion effect and a second promotion effect can be executed as promotion effects.
The first and second promotion effects are different from each other in terms of whether or not each effect is executed and in terms of the performance mode.

As shown in FIG. 9-13, the first promotion effect is an effect that is executed during a small win game, and includes the first promotion flash effect among the promotion flash effects, the promotion sound effect effect, and the first promotion image effect among the promotion image effects.

The first promotional blinking effect is an effect in which the V-determining winning device LED 87L blinks (lights up) in rainbow colors (seven colors) at a blinking cycle of 0.5 seconds. The promotional sound effect effect is an effect in which a promotional sound effect is played and output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The first promotional image effect is an effect in which the image display device 5 displays a first promotional image. This first promotional image is an image including a first arrow image in the center of the screen instructing the player to hit to the right to win a V, the text "Aim for V" in the lower left of the screen, and an updatable time gauge image indicating the remaining period during which the game is controlled to a small win game state. This first arrow image is an image displayed in rainbow colors (seven colors) and is a moving image that performs an animation operation (see FIG. 9-14). The text "Aim for V" is also displayed in rainbow colors (seven colors) (see FIG. 9-14).

Also, as shown in Figure 9-13, the second promotion effect is an effect that is executed during a small win game, and includes the second promotion flashing effect among the promotion flashing effects and the second promotion image effect among the promotion image effects.

The second promotional flashing effect is an effect in which the V-determination winning device LED87L flashes (lights up) red (single color) at a flashing cycle of 2 seconds. The second promotional image effect is an effect in which a second promotional image is displayed on the image display device 5. This second promotional image is an image that includes a second arrow image in the center of the screen that instructs the player to hit to the right to win a V, and the words "Please put the ball in the V" in the lower center of the screen. This second arrow image is displayed in white (single color) and is a still image that does not perform an animation action (see Figure 9-15). The words "Please put the ball in the V" are displayed in black (single color) (see Figure 9-15).

[Example of the first promotional performance]
Figure 9-14 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance image displayed on the image display device 5, the performance light emitted from the V-judgment winning device LED 87L, and the performance sound played back and output from the speakers 8L and 8R, which are related to the first promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 9-14 (1), when it is decided to execute the first promotion effect, the effect control CPU 120 executes the first promotion effect (in this example, the first promotion blink effect, the promotion sound effect, and the first promotion image effect), causes the V determination winning device LED 87L to blink (light up) in rainbow colors (seven colors) at a blinking cycle of 0.5 seconds, causes the speakers 8L and 8R to play and output the promotion sound effect, and causes the image display device 5 to display the first promotion image (the first arrow image 09TM11A, the text "Aim for V", and the time gauge image 09TM11T).

At this time, during the blinking period (0.5 seconds) of the first promotion blinking effect, the V-judgment winning device LED87L is not lit because it is the timing to turn off the LED. Also, an image of an animation in progress (a first arrow image displayed only in the center left part of the screen) is displayed as the first arrow image 09TM11A of the first promotion image.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-14 (2), the presentation control CPU 120 continues to execute the first promotion presentation (in this example, the first promotion blink presentation, the promotion sound effect presentation, and the first promotion image presentation), causes the V-determination winning device LED 87L to blink (light up) in rainbow colors (seven colors) at a blinking cycle of 0.5 seconds, plays and outputs the promotion sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R, and displays the first promotion image on the image display device 5.

At this time, the V-judgment winning device LED87L is supposed to emit light during the blinking period (0.5 seconds) of the first promotion blinking effect, so the V-judgment winning device LED87L emits rainbow colors. Also, an image of an animation in progress (a first arrow image displayed across the entire center of the screen) is displayed as the first arrow image 09TM11A of the first promotion image.

[Example of the second promotional performance]
FIG. 9-15 is an explanatory diagram showing the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 and the effect light emitted from the V-determination winning device LED 87L, which are related to the second promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 9-15 (1), when it is decided to execute the second promotion effect, the effect control CPU 120 executes the second promotion effect (in this example, the second flashing promotion effect and the second promotion image effect), causes the V-determination winning device LED 87L to flash (emit) red (one color) at a flashing cycle of 2 seconds, and causes the image display device 5 to display the second promotion image (the second arrow image 09TM12A and the words "Please put the ball in the V").

At this time, during the blinking period (2 seconds) of the first promotion blinking effect, the V-judgment winning device LED87L is not emitting light because it is the timing to turn off the V-judgment winning device LED87L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-15 (2), the presentation control CPU 120 continues to execute the second promotion presentation (in this example, the second promotion flashing presentation and the second promotion image presentation), causes the V-determination winning device LED 87L to flash (emit) red (one color) at a flashing cycle of 2 seconds, and causes the image display device 5 to display the second promotion image.

At this time, during the blinking period (2 seconds) of the second promotion blinking effect, the V-judgment winning device LED87L is supposed to emit light, so the V-judgment winning device LED87L is emitting red light. At this time, the second promotion image continues to be displayed in the same display mode as in Figure 9-15 (1).

In this embodiment, in which a big win occurs when the game ball enters (V-wins) the V-winning area 870 inside the V-determination winning device 87 during a small win game state, the first promotion effect is executed to draw attention to the V-determination winning device 87 and instruct the player to aim at (hit to the right) the V-determination winning device 87 in order to ensure a V-win (win in the V-winning area 870).

In addition, by executing a second promotion effect with a different presentation mode from the first promotion effect, the player is notified that a situation different from normal small win play (for example, a situation in which a power outage occurs during a small win play state, and a V win has not occurred even though the remaining control period of the small win play state after the power is restored is short), and the player can be instructed to aim at the V-judgment winning device 87 (hit to the right) to achieve a V win (win in the V winning area 870) in a presentation mode with a higher urgency than the first promotion effect (for example, the first promotion effect is a presentation mode to liven up the game, while the second promotion effect is a simple presentation mode to notify the player of what they should do).

[Processing for determining the effects at the end of a small win]
Figure 9-16 is a flowchart showing the presentation determination process executed at the end of a small win.
The presentation control CPU 120 executes the small win end presentation determination process shown in Figures 9-16 in the small win end presentation processing (step S175) of the presentation control process processing shown in Figure 7.
Specifically, when the presentation control CPU 120 receives a small hit end designation command, it determines the presentation to be executed (and the presentation not to be executed) after the small hit ends by the small hit end presentation determination process shown in Figure 9-16.

First, the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether or not a V winning designation command has been received (step S09TM3010). In other words, it determines whether or not a V winning has occurred during the small win game.

When a V winning designation command is received (YES in step S09TM3010), i.e., when a V winning has occurred in the small win game, the presentation control CPU 120 decides to display a small win combination of decorative symbols as the combination of decorative symbols to be displayed after the end of the big win game corresponding to the small win (step S09TM3020), and ends the process.

The "decorative symbol combination for a small win" determined in step S09TM3020 to be displayed after a big win via a small win is a combination of decorative symbols displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 on the start screen of one of the presentation modes (in this example, [Rush mode] or [Hyper rush mode]) that is controlled after the end of the big win game (time-saving big win via a small win) corresponding to the small win.

For example, in the variable display executed immediately before being controlled to the small win game state, a small win combination of decorative symbols (e.g., "3V3") that corresponds to the display result being a "small win" is displayed (stopped display, confirmed stop) in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and in the start screen of any of the presentation modes (in this example, Rush Mode or Hyper Rush Mode) that are controlled after the end of the big win game state corresponding to the small win, the small win combination of decorative symbols (e.g., "3V3") is displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5.

In this way, by determining in advance the combination of decorative symbols to be displayed on the start screen of one of the presentation modes (in this example, Rush Mode or Hyper Rush Mode) that is controlled after the end of the big win game state corresponding to the small win at the end of a small win, the processing burden associated with the presentation control at the start of one of the presentation modes that is controlled after the end of the big win game state corresponding to the small win can be reduced.

If a V-winning command has not been received (NO in step S09TM3010), i.e., if a small win failure has occurred during the small win game, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the power outage recovery flag is set (step S09TM3030).

If the power outage recovery flag is not set (NO in step S09TM3030), the presentation control CPU 120 decides to display a combination of decorative symbols for a big win as the combination of decorative symbols to be displayed after the small win game ends (step S09TM3040), and proceeds to step S09TM3050.

As described above in step S09TM1070 in FIG. 9-9 and in the explanation of FIG. 9-10 (B2), when the display result is a "small win," when determining the combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed at the end of the variable display, a "decorative symbol combination for a big win" is determined, and a "decorative symbol combination for a small win" that corresponds to this decorative symbol combination for a big win is also determined.

The "decorative symbol combination for a big win" determined in step S09TM3040 to be displayed after the end of a small win is a "decorative symbol combination for a big win" determined in advance together with the "decorative symbol combination for a small win" in step S09TM1070 of FIG. 9-9, and is a combination of decorative symbols displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 on the start screen of any of the presentation modes (in this example, [rush mode] or [normal mode]) that are not controlled to a big win game state based on the occurrence of a small win break and are controlled after the small win game ends.

For example, in the variable display executed immediately before the small win game state was controlled, a small win combination of decorative symbols (e.g., "3V3") that corresponds to the display result being a "small win" is displayed (stopped display, confirmed stop) in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and on the start screen of any of the presentation modes ([Rush mode], [Normal mode]) that are controlled after the small win game state ends, a big win combination of decorative symbols (e.g., "333") that corresponds to the small win combination of decorative symbols is displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5.

In this way, if a small win break occurs at the end of a small win, by determining in advance the combination of decorative patterns to be displayed on the start screen of one of the presentation modes (in this example, [Rush Mode] or [Normal Mode]) that is controlled after the end of the small win game state, it is possible to reduce the processing burden associated with the presentation control at the start of one of the presentation modes that is controlled after the end of the small win game state when a small win break occurs.

After processing step S09TM3040, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the third flag is set (step S09TM3050).

If the third flag is set (YES in step S09TM3050), the performance control CPU 120 proceeds to step S09TM3070.

If the third flag is not set (NO in step S09TM3050), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the remaining number of time-saving controls is 0 (step S09TM3060).

If the remaining number of time-saving controls is not 0 (NO in step S09TM3060), the performance control CPU 120 ends the process.

If the remaining number of time-saving controls is 0 (YES in step S09TM3060), the performance control CPU 120 proceeds to step S09TM3070.

If the third flag is set (YES in step S09TM3050), or if the third flag is not set and the number of remaining time-saving controls is 0 (YES in step S09TM3060), the performance control CPU 120 sets a result display flag (step S09TM3070) as described below, and ends the process.

In this embodiment, the "result display flag" is a type of flag that is set when, at the end of a small win, (A) the third flag is set and no V winning command has been received, or (B) the first or second flag is set and the number of remaining time-saving control turns is 0 and no V winning command has been received. This "result display flag" is a flag that indicates that a result display is to be displayed during the small win ED period, and is erased when the small win ED period ends.

In addition, if it is determined that the power outage recovery flag is set after step S09TM3010 is NO (step S09TM3030 is YES), the performance control CPU 120 decides to display a special combination of decorative symbols as the combination of decorative symbols to be displayed after the small win ends (step S09TM3080), and ends the processing.

In this way, if the V winning designation command is not received and the power failure recovery flag is set (when proceeding to processing after step S09TM3080), the process of setting the result display flag (step S09TM3070) is not executed, so if a power failure occurs during a small win game state and the game is controlled to the normal state without a V winning during the small win game state after the power is turned on, the result display flag is not set, so when the game is controlled to the normal state in the above situation, the result display is not displayed on the image display device 5.

When a power interruption occurs during a small win game state, and a small win failure occurs during the small win game state after the power is turned on and control is performed to the normal state, the result display is not displayed on the image display device 5, which can prevent the player's disappointment from increasing. In addition, by adopting a configuration in which the presentation control to display the result display is not performed after a power interruption occurs and the power is turned on, the processing burden of the presentation control can be reduced after the power is turned on, when it is difficult for the presentation control CPU 120 to grasp the exact number of jackpots and the total number of prize balls awarded.

The "special combination of decorative symbols" determined in step S09TM3080 to be displayed after the end of a small win is (X) a combination of decorative symbols different from the "combination of decorative symbols for small wins" previously determined in step S09TM1070 of FIG. 9-9, which is displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 on the start screen of any of the presentation modes (in this example, [Rush mode] and [Normal mode]) that are controlled after the end of a small win game without being controlled to a big win game state based on the occurrence of a small win break when a power cut and power on occurs during a small win game.

In addition, in this embodiment, this "special combination of decorative symbols" is a combination of decorative symbols exclusive to the above-mentioned case (X), which is different from the "miss combination of decorative symbols" and the "big win combination of decorative symbols", and the below-mentioned case (Y) of the recovery start screen during small win play when there is a power outage and power on during small win play. In this example, when the "special combination of decorative symbols" is displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, the decorative symbol combination of "135" is displayed.

For example, in the variable display executed immediately before being controlled to the small win game state, a small win combination of decorative symbols (e.g., "3V3") that corresponds to the display result being a "small win" is displayed (stopped display, confirmed stopped) in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and (X) a small win break occurs during the small win game, and based on the occurrence of the small win break, a special combination of decorative symbols (e.g., "135") is displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 on the start screen of any of the presentation modes ([Rush mode], [Normal mode]) that are controlled after the end of the small win game without being controlled to the big win game state.

In this way, if a power interruption occurs during a small win game state at the end of a small win and a small win failure occurs during this small win game, by determining in advance the combination of decorative symbols to be displayed on the start screen of one of the presentation modes (in this example, [Rush mode] or [Normal mode]) that is controlled after the end of the small win game state, it is possible to reduce the processing burden associated with the presentation control at the start of one of the presentation modes that is controlled after the end of the small win game state when a power interruption occurs during a small win game state and a small win failure occurs during this small win game.

[Combination of decorative designs when power is restored]
In this embodiment, the combination of decorative symbols displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the recovery start screen after the power is turned on (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as "initial results") is made to differ depending on the game state when the power failure occurs. Note that the following explanation will be given for the case where the variable display of the special symbols was not being executed when the power failure occurred.

If the game state when the power outage occurs is other than the small win game state (normal state excluding the period of the small win game state, time-saving state excluding the period of the small win game state, big win game state, etc.), the initial combination of decorative symbols (for example, "123") will be displayed as the combination of decorative symbols (initial result) in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the recovery start screen after the power is turned on.

On the other hand, if the game state when the power outage occurred was a small win game state, a special combination of decorative symbols (for example, "135") will be displayed as the decorative symbol combination (initial result) in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the recovery start screen after the power is turned on (case (Y) described above).

[Performance control command]
In this embodiment, the presentation control commands shown in the explanatory diagrams showing examples of the contents of the presentation control commands transmitted by the game control microcomputer 100 in Figures 8-5 and 8-6 are adopted, and below, we will explain the presentation control commands whose names and contents have been changed from the adopted presentation control commands.

<Pattern Confirmation Command> The pattern confirmation command in this embodiment is described below. In this embodiment, a pattern confirmation command is set to end the variable display of the first and second special patterns and to specify the pattern confirmation period until the next variable display begins.

In this embodiment, multiple types of pattern determination command are set as this pattern determination command. In this embodiment, a "pattern determination A command", a "pattern determination B command", and a "pattern determination C command" are set as examples of the pattern determination command.

The "Pattern Confirmation A Designation Command" is a presentation control command that specifies that a variable display that results in a "miss" display, excluding the time-saving final variable display, is to end, and that the pattern confirmation period is 0.5 seconds.

The "Pattern Confirmation B Designation Command" is a presentation control command that designates that the display result of the time-saving final variable display is to end when the variable display results in a "miss" and that the pattern confirmation period is 10 seconds.

The "Pattern Confirmation C Designation Command" is a presentation control command that specifies that the variable display that results in a "Big Win" or "Small Win" is to end, and that the pattern confirmation period is to be one second.

<Jackpot start command>
The jackpot start command in this embodiment will be described below. In this embodiment, a jackpot start command for specifying the start of a jackpot game state is set for each jackpot type shown in FIG.

In this embodiment, multiple types of jackpot start designation commands are set as this jackpot start designation command. In this embodiment, as examples of jackpot start designation commands, a "jackpot start A designation command", a "jackpot start B designation command", a "jackpot start C designation command", a "jackpot start D designation command", and a "jackpot start E designation command" are set according to the jackpot type.

<Jackpot end command>
The jackpot end command in this embodiment will be described below. In this embodiment, a jackpot end command that specifies the end of the jackpot game state is set for each jackpot type shown in FIG.

In this embodiment, multiple types of jackpot end designation commands are set as this jackpot end designation command. In this embodiment, as examples of jackpot end designation commands, a "jackpot end A designation command", a "jackpot end B designation command", a "jackpot end C designation command", a "jackpot end D designation command", and a "jackpot end E designation command" are set according to the jackpot type.

<Small hit start command>
The small win start designation command in this embodiment will be described below. In this embodiment, a small win start designation command that designates the start of a small win game state is set for each big win type shown in FIG.

In this embodiment, multiple types of small win start designation commands are set as this small win start designation command. In this embodiment, as examples of small win start designation commands, the "small win start A designation command", the "small win start B designation command", the "small win start C designation command", the "small win start D designation command", and the "small win start E designation command" are set according to the type of big win.

<Small hit end command>
The small win end designation command in this embodiment will be described below. In this embodiment, a small win end designation command that designates the end of the small win game state is set for each big win type shown in FIG.

In this embodiment, multiple types of small hit end designation commands are set as this small hit end designation command. In this embodiment, as examples of small hit end designation commands, the "small hit end A designation command", the "small hit end B designation command", the "small hit end C designation command", the "small hit end D designation command", and the "small hit end E designation command" are set according to the type of big hit.

[Result display timing]
In this embodiment, the timing for starting to display the result display, which shows information related to the number of jackpots and the total number of prize balls awarded, can be set to any of the following times.
(A) The timing when a symbol determination command is received in the final time-saving fluctuation (B) The timing when a small win end command is received in the small win corresponding to the time-saving fluctuation In the following explanation, the fluctuation display executed when the game state is controlled to the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) is appropriately referred to as "time-saving fluctuation" or "time-saving fluctuation display." Also, when the game state is controlled to the time-saving state, the fluctuation display executed when the remaining number of time-saving controls is 0 is appropriately referred to as "time-saving final fluctuation" or "time-saving final fluctuation display."

<(A) Timing of receiving the pattern determination command at the final time of the time-saving final change>
(A) In this embodiment, in the time-saving final variation display where the display result is "miss", at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variation display of the special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 that has received the symbol determination B designation command displays a result display on the image display device 5. At this time, the performance mode is controlled to any one of the [challenge mode], [rush mode], or [hyper rush mode].

Then, the performance control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display the result display for the pattern determination period (10 seconds) that is set based on receiving the pattern determination B designation command. Also, if there is one or more pending memories (variable displays whose execution is pending (up to four in this example)) corresponding to the start winning that occurred before the time-saving final variable display ends, the CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display the result display for the period during which the variable display corresponding to that pending memory is being executed and the pattern determination period corresponding to that pending memory.

<Time chart related to (A)>
FIG. 9-17 is a time chart showing the timing of displaying the result display in the above-mentioned case (A). In this example, the result display is shown when the display result of the time-saving final variable display is "miss", there are four reserved memories (variable displays whose execution is pending) corresponding to the start winning that occurred before the time-saving final variable display ends, and all of the display results are "miss".

In the final time-saving variation display where the display result is "miss", at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variation display of the second special symbol (timing T1 shown in Figure 9-17), the performance control CPU 120 receives the symbol confirmation B designation command and causes the image display device 5 to display the result display.

Then, after the pattern determination period (10 seconds) has elapsed, at the timing (T2A shown in FIG. 9-17) when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the next second special pattern (the variable display corresponding to the first of the four reserved memories), the performance control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to continue displaying the result display.

Next, at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol (timing T2B shown in Figure 9-17), the performance control CPU 120, which has received the symbol determination A designation command, causes the image display device 5 to continue displaying the result display.

Then, for the variable displays corresponding to the second, third, and fourth of the four pending memories, the performance control CPU 120 also causes the image display device 5 to continue to display the result display.

Next, when the period for determining the pattern of the variable display corresponding to the fourth reserved memory (0.5 seconds) has elapsed (timing T6 shown in Figure 9-17), the performance control CPU 120 erases the result display from the image display device 5.

In this embodiment, the result display is displayed on the image display device 5 for a total of 1.5 seconds, which is the period during which the pending memory changes and the display result is "miss" (1 second), and the pattern confirmation period corresponding to that change (0.5 seconds). In this example, since the number of pending memories is 4, the result display is displayed on the image display device 5 for 1.5 x 4 = 6 seconds (the period from T2A to T6 shown in Figure 9-17). Therefore, in this embodiment, the result display is displayed for the period that is the sum of the pattern confirmation period (10 seconds) and 1.5 x pending memory number (0 to 4) = 0 to 6 seconds.

<(B) Timing of receiving a small hit end command in a small hit corresponding to time-saving fluctuation>
(B) In this embodiment, when a small win break occurs in a small win game corresponding to (B-1) a time-saving final change display in which the display result is a "small win" when the presentation mode is [Challenge Mode] or [Rush Mode], or (B-2) a time-saving change display in which the display result is a "small win" when the presentation mode is [Hyper Rush Mode] (i.e., the result display flag is set), and the CPU 103 ends the small win game, the presentation control CPU 120 receives a small win end designation command and causes the image display device 5 to display a result display.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 displays the result display on the image display device 5 for the small win ED period (3 seconds) based on the result display flag being set and the receipt of the small win end command. Also, if there is one or more pending memories (variable displays whose execution is pending (up to 4 in this example)) corresponding to the start winning that occurred before the last variable display (the previous variable display) ended when controlled in the time-saving state, the CPU 120 displays the result display on the image display device 5 for the period during which the variable display corresponding to that pending memory is being executed (variable display period) and the pattern determination period corresponding to that variable display.

<Time chart related to (B)>
Fig. 9-18 is a time chart showing the timing of displaying the result display in the above-mentioned case (B). In this example, when the above-mentioned (B-1) presentation mode is [challenge mode] or [rush mode], a small win break occurs in a small win game corresponding to the time-saving final variable display whose display result is "small win" (the result display flag is set), and there are four reserved memories (variable displays whose execution is reserved) corresponding to the start winning that occurred before the time-saving final variable display ends, and all of the display results are "misses", an example of displaying the result display is shown.

In the final time-saving variation display where the display result is "small win", at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variation display of the special symbol (timing T1 shown in Figure 9-18), the performance control CPU 120 receives the symbol determination C designation command and does not display the result display on the image display device 5.

Next, after the pattern determination period (1 second) has elapsed, at the timing when the CPU 103 controls the game state to the small win game state (timing T2 shown in FIG. 9-18), the presentation control CPU 120, which has received the small win start designation command, does not continue to display the result display on the image display device 5.

Next, at the timing when the CPU 103 should end control of the small win game state (timing T3 shown in Figure 9-18), the presentation control CPU 120 receives a small win end designation command and causes the image display device 5 to display a result display based on the result display flag being set.

Next, after the small win ED period (3 seconds) has elapsed, the CPU 103 ends the small win game state and starts the next variable display of the second special pattern (the variable display corresponding to the first of the four reserved memories) (timing T4A shown in Figure 9-18), at which point the performance control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to continue displaying the result display.

Next, at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol (timing T4B shown in Figure 9-18), the performance control CPU 120, which has received the symbol determination A designation command, causes the image display device 5 to continue displaying the result display.

Then, for the variable displays corresponding to the second, third, and fourth of the four pending memories, the performance control CPU 120 also causes the image display device 5 to continue to display the result display.

Next, when the period for determining the pattern of the variable display corresponding to the fourth reserved memory (0.5 seconds) has elapsed (timing T8 shown in Figure 9-18), the performance control CPU 120 erases the result display from the image display device 5.

In this embodiment, the result display is displayed on the image display device 5 for a total of 1.5 seconds, which is the period during which the pending memory changes and the display result is "miss" (1 second), and the pattern confirmation period (0.5 seconds) corresponding to that change. In this example, since the number of pending memories is 4, the result display is displayed on the image display device 5 for 1.5 x 4 = 6 seconds (the period from T4A to T8 shown in Figure 9-18). Therefore, in this embodiment, the result display is displayed for the period consisting of the small win ending period (3 seconds) and 1.5 x pending memory number (0 to 4) = 0 to 6 seconds.

As shown in Figures 9-17 and 9-18, when the game is controlled back to normal after the time-saving feature has finished or after a small win break, the result display is displayed on the image display device 5 for a certain period of time (the pattern determination period, the small win ending period), allowing the player to accurately recognize information related to the number of big wins and the total number of prize balls awarded.

In this embodiment, an example is shown in which the small hit end designation command is set to the small hit end A designation command through the small hit end E designation command, but the present invention is not limited to this form, and other types of small hit end designation commands may be set.

For example, if no V winning occurs at the end of the small win, the CPU 103 may set a flag indicating that a small win break has occurred and transmit a small win end F designation command dedicated to the occurrence of a small win break. This small win end F designation command is a type of presentation control command that designates that the small win game state has ended and that the small win ending period is 10 seconds. The 10 seconds of the small win ending period designated by this small win end F designation command is a period longer than the small win ending period at the end of a normal small win game state, and is a period during which a result display can be performed during the small win ending period.

[Variations on whether or not results are displayed]
In the above embodiment, a small win break occurs in a small win game corresponding to (B-1) the time-saving final variation display in which the display result is "small win" when the presentation mode is [challenge mode] or [rush mode], or (B-2) the time-saving variation display in which the display result is "small win" when the presentation mode is [hyper rush mode], and when the CPU 103 ends the small win game, the presentation control CPU 120 receives a small win end designation command and displays a result display on the image display device 5. However, the present invention is not limited to this form, and when a small win break occurs in a small win game corresponding to (B-1) or (B-2), the result display may not be displayed on the image display device 5 at any timing. In this case, the result display can be prevented from being displayed by configuring the result display flag not to be set in step S09TM3070.

For example, (B-1) when the presentation mode is [Challenge Mode] or [Rush Mode], if a small win break occurs in a small win game corresponding to the time-saving final variable display in which the display result is a "small win" (the result display flag is not set), and there are four pending memories (variable displays whose execution is pending) corresponding to the start wins that occurred before the time-saving final variable display ended, and all of the display results are "misses," the presentation control CPU 120 will not display the result display on the image display device 5 during the small win ending period or the variable display period corresponding to the pending memories.

[Modification of the timing of displaying the results]
In this embodiment, when a small hit puncture occurs and the result display flag is set, the timing to start displaying the result display showing information related to the number of jackpots and the total number of prize balls awarded can be set to (B) the timing when a small hit end designation command is received for a small hit corresponding to a time-saving fluctuation, but the present invention is not limited to this form, and when a small hit puncture occurs and the result display flag is set, the timing to start displaying the result display can be set to a timing different from (B).

For example, when a small hit break occurs and the result display flag is set, the timing for starting to display the result display showing information related to the number of big hits and the total number of prize balls awarded can be set to the following times.
(C) The timing of receiving the fluctuation pattern designation command corresponding to the first fluctuation display after the end of the small win

<(C) Timing of receiving the fluctuation pattern designation command corresponding to the first fluctuation display after the end of the small win>
(C) In this embodiment, when a small win puncture occurs (i.e., the result display flag is set) in a small win game corresponding to (C-1) the time-saving final variation display in which the display result is a "small win" when the presentation mode is [Challenge Mode] or [Rush Mode], or (C-2) the time-saving variation display in which the display result is a "small win" when the presentation mode is [Hyper Rush Mode], and the CPU 103 ends the small win game, and there are one or more pending memories (variable displays whose execution is pending (up to four in this example)) corresponding to the starting winning that occurred before the final variation display when controlled in the time-saving state is ended, the presentation control CPU 120, which has received a variation pattern designation command corresponding to that variation display, displays a result display on the image display device 5 at the timing of starting the variation display corresponding to the first pending memory.

Then, based on the result display flag being set and the reception of the variation pattern designation command, the performance control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display the result display for the variation display period and the pattern determination period (0.5 seconds) corresponding to that variation display. Similarly, the performance control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display the result display for the period during which the variation display corresponding to the remaining pending memory corresponding to the start winning that occurred before the final variation display ended when controlled in the time-saving state is being executed, and for the pattern determination period corresponding to that variation display.

<Time chart related to (C)>
9-19 is a time chart showing the timing of displaying the result display in the above-mentioned case (C). In this example, when the above-mentioned (C-1) presentation mode is [challenge mode] or [rush mode], a small win break occurs in a small win game corresponding to the time-saving final variable display whose display result is "small win" (the result display flag is set), and there are four reserved memories (variable displays whose execution is reserved) corresponding to the start winning that occurred before the time-saving final variable display ends, and all of the display results are "misses", an example of displaying the result display is shown.

In the final time-saving variation display where the display result is "small win", at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variation display of the special pattern (timing T1 shown in Figure 9-19), the performance control CPU 120, which has received the pattern determination C specification command, does not display the result display on the image display device 5.

Next, after the pattern determination period (1 second) has elapsed, at the timing when the CPU 103 controls the game state to the small win game state (timing T2 shown in FIG. 9-19), the presentation control CPU 120, which has received the small win start command, does not continue to display the result display on the image display device 5.

Next, at the timing when the CPU 103 should end control of the small win game state (timing T3 shown in Figure 9-19), the presentation control CPU 120 receives a small win end designation command and does not display the result display on the image display device 5.

Next, after the small win ED period (3 seconds) has elapsed, the CPU 103 ends the small win game state and starts the next variable display of the second special pattern (the variable display corresponding to the first of the four reserved memories) (timing T4A shown in Figure 9-19). The performance control CPU 120, which has received the variable pattern designation command, displays the result display on the image display device 5 based on the result display flag being set.

Next, at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol (timing T4B shown in Figure 9-19), the performance control CPU 120, which has received the symbol determination A designation command, causes the image display device 5 to continue displaying the result display.

Then, for the variable displays corresponding to the second, third, and fourth of the four pending memories, the performance control CPU 120 also causes the image display device 5 to continue to display the result display.

Next, when the period for determining the pattern of the variable display corresponding to the fourth reserved memory (0.5 seconds) has elapsed (timing T8 shown in Figure 9-19), the performance control CPU 120 erases the result display from the image display device 5.

In this embodiment, the result display is displayed on the image display device 5 for a total of 1.5 seconds, which is the period during which the pending memory changes and the display result is "miss" (1 second), and the pattern confirmation period corresponding to that change (0.5 seconds). In this example, since the number of pending memories is 4, the result display is displayed on the image display device 5 for 1.5 x 4 = 6 seconds (the period from T4A to T8 shown in Figure 9-19). Therefore, in this embodiment, the result display is displayed for a period of 1.5 x number of pending memories (0 to 4) = 0 to 6 seconds.

Here, if the number of reserved memories is 0, there is no reserved memory, and therefore the CPU 103 has not sent a variation pattern designation command to the performance control CPU 120. In this modified example, in which display control of the result display is started based on receiving a variation pattern designation command, the performance control CPU 120, which has not received a variation pattern designation command, cannot start displaying the result display. In this case, the result display may be displayed for a specified period after the small winning ending period (such as the period until the next variation display starts while waiting for customers).

In this embodiment, the result display is a common presentation mode in any of the above cases (A) to (C). That is, the result display displayed during the pattern determination period or small win ending period corresponding to the final time-saving variation, and the result display displayed during the variation display period or pattern determination period corresponding to the reserved memory, are common presentation modes. In this example, the result display is an image that includes the characters "FEVER x X" (X = number of jackpots) indicating the number of jackpots, and the characters "TOTAL YYYYpt" (YYYY = total number of awarded prize balls) indicating the total number of awarded prize balls (see Figure 9-25 (19)).

In this embodiment, when the display result is either "big hit" or "small hit" on the first to fourth spins of the remaining reserve in challenge mode or rush mode, the fluctuation pattern may be determined using a [big hit/small hit] fluctuation pattern determination table that is common to the case when the display result is either "big hit" or "small hit" on the first to fourth spins of the remaining reserve in hyper rush mode.

In this case, regardless of whether the presentation mode is Challenge Mode, Rush Mode, or Hyper Rush Mode, if the display result on the remaining reserved balls for the first to fourth spins is either a "Big Hit" or a "Small Hit," a result presentation is executed that displays a result display showing information related to the number of big hits and the total number of prize balls awarded, and a revival presentation is executed in which a shooting star is displayed on the result display.

Therefore, in this embodiment, where the result display is a common presentation style regardless of the situation, even if the result display is displayed in any of cases (A) to (C), the player can be made to look forward to the revival presentation in which a shooting star is displayed in the result display, thereby increasing the interest when the result display is displayed.

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the result display can be displayed when there are zero pending memories (variable displays whose execution is pending) corresponding to start winnings that occurred before the time-saving final variable display ends, but this is not limited to the above, and the display of the result display may be restricted when there are zero pending memories (variable displays whose execution is pending) corresponding to start winnings that occurred before the time-saving final variable display ends.

For example, if there are zero pending memories (variable displays whose execution is pending) corresponding to the starting winnings that occurred before the time-saving final variable display ended, the result display will not be displayed during the small win ending period. In this case, since there are zero pending memories, the variable display corresponding to the pending memories will not be executed, and the display result will be a "big win" or "small win", and the revival performance will not be executed, so it is possible to prevent the player from expecting the revival performance to be executed by the result display being displayed.

[Waiting for customers demo performance]
In this embodiment, when a special game or the like is not being executed, if the execution conditions for the customer waiting demo performance described below (see Figures 9-20 and 9-21 (A)) are met, a customer waiting demo performance can be executed in which a demo display (demonstration display) is displayed on the image display device 5.
In this example, the demo display includes the word "DEMO" and a notification image (in this example, an image displaying the words "P Fever XXX" (the name of this gaming machine)).

[Demo display effect determination process]
Fig. 9-20 is a flowchart showing the performance determination process executed during the waiting period until the variable display starts (hereinafter referred to as "waiting for customers" or "waiting for customers" as appropriate). The performance control CPU 120 executes the demo display performance determination process shown in Fig. 9-20 during the waiting for variable display start process (step S170) of the performance control process shown in Fig. 7. Specifically, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a customer waiting demo designation command, it determines the performance to be executed (and the performance not to be executed) during the waiting for customers by the demo display performance determination process shown in Fig. 9-20.

First, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a customer waiting demo performance is being performed (step S09TM4010). If a customer waiting demo performance is being performed (YES in step S09TM4010), the performance control CPU 120 ends the process.

If the customer waiting demo performance is not being executed (NO in step S09TM4010), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a customer waiting demo designation command has been received (step S09TM4020). If the customer waiting demo designation command has not been received (NO in step S09TM4020), the performance control CPU 120 ends the process.

When a customer waiting demo designation command is received (YES in step S09TM4020), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the conditions for executing the customer waiting demo performance are met based on the customer waiting demo performance execution condition table (see FIG. 9-21 (A)) (step S09TM4030). When the conditions for executing the customer waiting demo performance are not met (NO in step S09TM4030), the performance control CPU 120 ends the process.

If the conditions for executing the customer waiting demo performance are met (YES in step S09TM4030), the performance control CPU 120 decides to execute the customer waiting demo performance and ends the processing.

<Table of execution conditions for customer waiting demo performance>
Fig. 9-21(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an execution condition table for a customer waiting demo performance. As shown in Fig. 9-21(A), the execution condition table for a customer waiting demo performance stores a condition number (condition No.) and an execution condition for a customer waiting demo performance corresponding to the condition number (whether or not the power failure recovery flag is set, and a customer waiting waiting time) in association with each other. The customer waiting waiting time is the elapsed time when there is no reserved data in either the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer.
Below, we will explain in detail each condition number and the execution conditions for the customer waiting demo performance corresponding to this condition number.

(Condition No. “SP-01”)
In condition No. “SP-01”, as an execution condition for the customer waiting demo performance, the power outage recovery flag is set to “not set” and the customer waiting time is set to “60 seconds or more”.
That is, when the power outage recovery flag is not set and the customer waiting time has elapsed for 60 seconds, this condition No. "SP-01" is met.

(Condition No. "SP-02")
In condition No. “SP-02”, as an execution condition for the customer waiting demo performance, the power outage recovery flag is set to “(the power outage recovery flag) is set”, and the customer waiting time is set to “10 seconds or more”.
That is, when the power interruption recovery flag is set and the customer waiting time has elapsed for 10 seconds, this condition No. "SP-02" is met.

In this way, the customer waiting waiting time until the customer waiting demo performance is executed when there has been a power outage immediately before can be set to a period that is shorter than the customer waiting waiting time until the customer waiting demo performance is executed when there has not been a power outage immediately before, and an appropriate period can be set as the period until the customer waiting demo performance is executed.

[Restoration notification]
In this embodiment, when power is restored from a power outage, a restoration notification effect can be executed in which a restoration display is displayed to notify that power has been restored. The restoration display is an image including the text "Power outage restoration in progress" that is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5.

In this embodiment, the recovery display is an image with a higher display priority than the various effect images (background image, decorative patterns, etc.). In addition, the second promotion image that is displayed when power is restored from a power outage during a small win is an image with a higher display priority than the recovery display. Therefore, to the player, the second promotion image, the recovery display, and the various effect images appear to be displayed in that order. However, in this example, since the display area of the recovery display is the entire screen of the image display device 5, it is difficult to see the various effect images (see Figure 9-27 (2)). Here, "high display priority" means, for example, that the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in front.

In this embodiment, when power is turned on after a power outage (power recovery), in the process (step S7) of sending a command at the time of recovery of the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the execution period of the recovery notification presentation can be made different depending on the game state at the time of recovery (hereinafter referred to as the "game state at recovery") designated by a presentation control command (for example, a game state designation command at recovery) that designates the backed-up game state before the power outage among the presentation control commands that instruct recovery from the power outage and are sent to the presentation control CPU 120 (see FIG. 9-21 (B)).

<Table for determining execution period of recovery notification performance>
9-21(B) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining the execution period of the restoration notification effect. As shown in FIG. 9-21(B), in this embodiment, the execution period of the restoration notification effect is determined according to the game state at the time of restoration.

If the game state at the time of recovery is a "small win game state," the execution period of the recovery notification effect is determined to be "0.5 seconds or less."

When the game state at the time of recovery is a "small win game state," the execution period of the recovery notification effect of "0.5 seconds or less" means, in this embodiment, that if the remaining control period in which the game state is controlled to a small win game state when the power outage is restored (hereinafter referred to as the "remaining small win period" as appropriate) is 0.5 seconds or more, the execution period of the recovery notification effect is determined to be "0.5 seconds," and if the remaining small win period is 0.5 seconds or less when the power outage is restored, the execution period of the recovery notification effect is determined to be "(remaining small win period - 0.004) seconds." For example, if the remaining small win period is 0.3 seconds when the power outage is restored, the execution period of the recovery notification effect is determined to be "(0.3 - 0.004) = 0.296 seconds."

Therefore, in this embodiment, if the game state at the time of power recovery is a small win game state, the execution period of the recovery notification display is set to a period shorter than the remaining small win period, regardless of the remaining small win period. In other words, the recovery notification display ends and the display of the recovery display also ends before the small win game state at the time of power recovery ends.

If the game state at the time of recovery is a "game state other than a small win game state," the execution period of the recovery notification effect is determined to be "5 seconds." A "game state other than a small win game state" is a "normal state excluding the period of the small win game state" or a "big win game state."

[Examples of effects when a V win occurs or when a small win breaks out]
Next, examples of the presentation when a V win occurs and when a small win break occurs will be explained using Figures 9-22 to 9-25.

Figure 9-22 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to the occurrence of a V win and a small win break, and Figures 9-23 to 9-25 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of effect images related to the occurrence of a V win and a small win break.

In this example, when the presentation mode is controlled to [Rush Mode], a variable display of the second special pattern that results in a "small win" is executed, a V win occurs in the small win game that corresponds to this variable display, and a jackpot game with a small win via jackpot type of "11 (10) R time-limited jackpot via small win (99 times)" is played. After that, when the presentation mode is controlled to [Hyper Rush Mode], a variable display of the second special pattern that results in a "small win" is executed, a small win puncture occurs in the small win game that corresponds to this variable display, and the result display is displayed without the jackpot game being played.

First, as shown in FIG. 9-23 (1), at the timing when the reach state in the variable pattern should be established (timing T1 shown in FIG. 9-22), the performance control CPU 120 brings about the reach state by displaying decorative patterns including the character "C" and the number "3" frozen in the pattern display area 5L and pattern display area 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r continue to display the small patterns. That is, the small pattern display area 5l corresponding to the pattern display area 5L where the decorative pattern is frozen, and the small pattern display area 5r corresponding to the pattern display area 5R where the decorative pattern is frozen, continue to display the small patterns frozen without being frozen.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays the active display 09TM03 corresponding to the currently executing variable display in the active display area 09TM03E. The performance control CPU 120 also displays "0" in the first pending memory count display area 09TM05E, and displays "0" in the second pending memory count display area 09TM06E.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays the words "RUSH MODE" in the upper center of the screen of the image display device 5 based on the fact that the performance mode is [RUSH MODE], and displays the words "5 times remaining" in the upper left of the screen of the image display device 5, corresponding to the remaining number of time-saving controls being 5 times. The performance control CPU 120 also displays a third promotion image in the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5. This third promotion image is an image that includes the words "Hit right" and a third arrow image 09TM13A that instructs a right hit to win a prize in the second start winning hole or a V prize.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-23 (2), at the timing when the operation prompting display 09TM31B in the variable pattern should be displayed (timing T2 shown in FIG. 9-22), the performance control CPU 120 displays the operation prompting display 09TM31B in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, prompting the player to operate the push button 31B.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-23(3), when the player operates the push button 31B (timing T3 in FIG. 9-22), the presentation control CPU 120 executes a symbol stop action presentation, and performs an action on the small winning combination of decorative symbols that results in a "big win" in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (in this example, the decorative symbols including the character "C" and the number "3", the decorative symbols including the character "V" and the English letter "V", and the decorative symbols including the character "C" and the number "3" are enlarged and acted on), executes a symbol stop sound presentation, and plays and outputs a symbol stop sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R. At this time, the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r execute a variable display of small symbols.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-23(4), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol (timing T4 shown in FIG. 9-22), the performance control CPU 120, which has received the symbol determination C designation command, ends the symbol stop action performance, ends the decorative symbol action in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, determines and stops the final decorative symbol small win combination (in this example, "3V3"), ends the symbol stop sound performance, and ends the playback output of the symbol stop sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R. At this time, the small symbol combination (in this example, "3V3") is determined and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the active display 09TM03 is erased from the active display area 09TM03E.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-23(5), when the CPU 103 starts the small win game state (period T5 to T6 shown in FIG. 9-22), the presentation control CPU 120 executes the first promotion presentation (in this example, the first promotion blinking presentation, the promotion sound effect presentation, and the first promotion image presentation), causes the V determination winning device LED 87L to blink (light up) in rainbow colors (seven colors) at a blinking cycle of 0.5 seconds, causes the speakers 8L and 8R to play and output promotion sound effects, and causes the image display device 5 to display the first promotion image (first arrow image 09TM11A, the text "Aim for V", and the time gauge image 09TM11T). At this time, an image in the middle of an animation operation (the first arrow image displayed in the entire center of the screen) is displayed as the first arrow image 09TM11A of the first promotion image.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-23 (6), when the operating port of the V-determining winning device 87 is opened during a small win game, the game ball enters the V-winning area 870 and is detected by the V-winning switch 87a during the specified valid period (timing T6 shown in FIG. 9-22), the presentation control CPU 120 ends some of the first promotion presentations (promotion sound effect presentation, and the first promotion image presentation that displays the first arrow image and the words "Aim for V") and displays a V-winning occurrence notification display (in this example, the words "V GET") in the center of the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, at the timing when the CPU 103 should end the small win game state (timing T7 shown in Figure 9-22), the presentation control CPU 120 determines in the small win end presentation determination process (see Figure 9-16) to display a small win combination of decorative symbols as the combination of decorative symbols to be displayed after the end of the big win game corresponding to the small win (step S09TM3020).

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-23 (7), when the CPU 103 starts the jackpot game state (at the timing of T8 shown in FIG. 9-22), the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation receives the jackpot start command and displays the words "MAX FEVER" on the entire screen of the image display device 5 to notify that the jackpot type via small jackpot is a "11 (10) R time-limited jackpot via small jackpot".

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-23 (8), at the timing when the CPU 103 should end the jackpot game state (timing T9 shown in FIG. 9-22), the presentation control CPU 120 receives the jackpot end designation command and displays, over the entire screen of the image display device 5, a caption display 09TM20 including the word "HYPER" to notify that the next presentation mode to be controlled is [Hyper Rush Mode], and the word "Battle Rush" throughout the jackpot ending period.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-24 (9), at the timing when the big win ending period ends (timing T10 shown in FIG. 9-22), the presentation control CPU 120 controls the presentation mode to [Hyper Rush Mode] and displays the small win combination of decorative symbols (in this example, "3V3") determined in the small win end presentation determination process in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. At this time, the small symbol combination (in this example, "3V3") is displayed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 does not display the active display 09TM03 in the active display area 09TM03E, since no variable display is currently being executed. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 displays "0" in the first pending memory count display area 09TM05E, and displays "0" in the second pending memory count display area 09TM06E.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120, based on the fact that the performance mode is [Hyper Rush Mode], displays the words "Hyper Rush Mode" in the upper center of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays a caption including the word "HYPER" in the upper right and lower left parts of the screen of the image display device 5. The performance control CPU 120 also displays a third promotion image in the lower right part of the screen of the image display device 5. This third promotion image is an image that includes the words "Hit Right" and a third arrow image 09TM13A that instructs a right hit to win a prize in the second start winning hole or a V prize.

In this embodiment, when the presentation mode is [Hyper Rush Mode], information related to the remaining number of time-saving control turns is not displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. This is to prevent the player from feeling annoyed by displaying the remaining number of time-saving turns in this configuration in which the next "big hit" or "small hit" is essentially confirmed when the presentation mode is [Hyper Rush Mode], and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

As shown in Figures 9-23 (3) and (4), in the variable display executed immediately before the control to the small win game state, "3V3" is displayed (stopped display, confirmed stopped) in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 as a small win combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the display result being "small win", and as shown in Figure 9-24 (9), in the start screen of the presentation mode (in this example, [Hyper Rush Mode]) controlled after the end of the big win game state corresponding to the small win, "3V3" is displayed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 as a small win combination of decorative symbols.

In this embodiment, depending on the number of rotations of the variable display executed under control in the time-saving state, each variable display is appropriately referred to as a "variable display (Nth rotation of time-saving)." For example, if the number of rotations of the variable display executed under control in the time-saving state is the "first rotation," the variable display is referred to as a "variable display (first rotation of time-saving)," and if the number of rotations of the variable display executed under control in the time-saving state is the "seventh rotation," the variable display is referred to as a "variable display (seventh rotation of time-saving)."

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-24 (10), when a new start winning occurs in the second start winning hole (variable winning ball device 6B) and the CPU 103 starts the variable display (first time of time-saving) of the second special symbol that results in a "miss", the performance control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 based on the variable pattern specified by the variable pattern specification command (timing T11 shown in FIG. 9-22). At this time, the performance control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays a new active display 09TM03 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed in the active display area 09TM03E.

In this example, during the period in which this variable display is being executed, two new start winning entries occur in the second start winning port (variable winning ball device 6B) (both reserved memories are displayed as "misses"), the second reserved memory count becomes "2", "2" is displayed in the second reserved memory count display area 09TM06E, and two second reserved displays 09TM02 are displayed in the second reserved display area 09TM02E.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-24 (11), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol (first time-saving spin) (timing T12 shown in FIG. 9-22), the performance control CPU 120, which has received the symbol determination A designation command, determines and stops the final decorative symbol combination for a losing combination (in this example, "142") in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. At this time, the small symbol combination (in this example, "142") is determined and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the active display 09TM03 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed is erased from the active display area 09TM03E.

Next, after the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the second special symbol (second and third spins of the time-saving period), as shown in FIG. 9-24 (12), a new start winning occurs in the second start winning hole (variable winning ball device 6B), and the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol (fourth spin of the time-saving period) whose display result is a "small win." The CPU 120 for controlling the performance starts the variable display of the decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 based on the variable pattern specified by the variable pattern specification command (timing T13 shown in FIG. 9-22). At this time, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance starts the variable display of the small symbol in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance displays a new active display 09TM03 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed in the active display area 09TM03E.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-24 (13), at the timing when the reach state in the variable pattern should be established (timing T14 shown in FIG. 9-22), the performance control CPU 120 creates a reach state by statically displaying decorative symbols including the character "B" and the number "2" in the symbol display area 5L and symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the variable display of small symbols continues in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-24 (14), at the timing when the operation prompting display 09TM31B in the variable pattern should be displayed (timing T15 shown in FIG. 9-22), the performance control CPU 120 displays the operation prompting display 09TM31B in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, prompting the player to operate the push button 31B.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-24 (15), when the player operates the push button 31B (timing T16 shown in FIG. 9-22), the presentation control CPU 120 executes a symbol stop action presentation, and performs an action on the small winning combination of decorative symbols that results in a "big win" in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (in this example, the decorative symbols including the character "B" and the number "2", the decorative symbols including the character "V" and the English letter "V", and the decorative symbols including the character "B" and the number "2" are enlarged and acted on), executes a symbol stop sound presentation, and plays and outputs a symbol stop sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R. At this time, the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r execute a variable display of small symbols.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-24 (16), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol (timing T17 shown in FIG. 9-22), the performance control CPU 120, which has received the symbol determination C designation command, ends the symbol stop action performance, ends the decorative symbol action in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, determines and stops the final decorative symbol small win combination (in this example, "2V2"), ends the symbol stop sound performance, and ends the playback output of the symbol stop sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R. At this time, the small symbol combination (in this example, "2V2") is determined and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the active display 09TM03 is erased from the active display area 09TM03E.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-25 (17), when the CPU 103 starts the small win game state (period T18 to T19 shown in FIG. 9-22), the presentation control CPU 120 executes the first promotion presentation (in this example, the first promotion blinking presentation, the promotion sound effect presentation, and the first promotion image presentation), causes the V-determination winning device LED 87L to blink (light up) in rainbow colors (seven colors) at a blinking cycle of 0.5 seconds, causes the speakers 8L and 8R to play and output promotion sound effects, and causes the image display device 5 to display the first promotion image (first arrow image 09TM11A, the text "Aim for V", and the time gauge image 09TM11T). At this time, an image in the middle of an animation operation (the first arrow image displayed across the entire center of the screen) is displayed as the first arrow image 09TM11A of the first promotion image.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-25 (18), at a predetermined timing (timing T19 shown in FIG. 9-22) for displaying the small win end suggestion display described later, the presentation control CPU 120 displays the small win end suggestion display 09TM30 (in this example, an image with a display mode that makes the screen crack) on the entire screen of the image display device 5, suggesting that the small win game state will end without the occurrence of a V winning. This small win end suggestion display is an image with a higher display priority (it appears to be displayed in front because it has a higher display layer) than various presentation images related to small win gameplay (such as the first promotion image). Therefore, to the player, it appears to be displayed in the order of the small win end suggestion display and various presentation images related to small win gameplay.

In this embodiment, the "predetermined timing for displaying the small win end indication" is set to one second before the control of the small win game state ends. Therefore, even during the period when the small win end indication is displayed, the game state is controlled to the small win game state, and the player can win a V, albeit for a short time. Because this type of format is adopted, even during the period when the small win end indication is displayed, the third promotion image (the characters "Hit right" and the third arrow image 09TM13A) is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, at the timing when the CPU 103 should end the small win game state (timing T20 shown in Figure 9-22), the presentation control CPU 120, in the small win end presentation decision process (see Figure 9-16), decides to display a big win combination of decorative symbols as the combination of decorative symbols to be displayed after the small win game ends (step S09TM3040), and sets the result display flag (step S09TM3070).

As shown in FIG. 9-25 (19), the presentation control CPU 120, which has received the small win end command, based on the fact that the result display flag is set, displays the result display 09TM40 (in this example, the characters "FEVER x 2" indicating the number of big wins, and the characters "TOTAL 1950pt" indicating the total number of prize balls awarded) on the entire screen of the image display device 5 during the small win ending period (the period from T20 to T21 shown in FIG. 9-22).

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 ends the first promotion performance (in this example, the first promotion flashing performance, the promotion sound effect performance, and the first promotion image performance), ends the flashing (light emission) of the V-determination winning device LED 87L, ends the playback output of the promotion sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R, and erases the first promotion image from the image display device 5.

In this example, since there are zero reserved memories corresponding to start winnings that occurred before the final variable display (fourth time-saving spin) ends when the machine is in the time-saving state, the result display is only shown during the small winning ending period.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-25 (20), at the timing when the small win ending period ends (timing T21 shown in FIG. 9-22), the presentation control CPU 120 controls the presentation mode to [normal mode (sunny mode)] and displays the combination of decorative symbols for a big win (in this example, "222") determined in the presentation determination process at the end of the small win in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. At this time, the combination of small symbols (in this example, "222") is displayed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, based on the fact that the presentation mode is [normal mode (sunny mode)], the sunny background image 09TM60A is displayed on the image display device 5 as the background image of the decorative symbols.

At this time, because the symbol stop action effect is not executed, no action is performed on the combination of decorative symbols, and because the symbol stop sound effect is not executed, the symbol stop sound effect is not played or output from speakers 8L, 8R. In this way, when the game is controlled to [normal mode] via a small win break, the symbol stop action effect and symbol stop sound effect are not executed, which can prevent the player from misunderstanding that an advantageous event is occurring, which can lead to increased disappointment for the player.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 does not display the active display 09TM03 in the active display area 09TM03E, since no variable display is currently being executed. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 displays "0" in the first pending memory count display area 09TM05E, and displays "0" in the second pending memory count display area 09TM06E.

As shown in Figures 9-24 (15) and (16), in the variable display executed immediately before the control to the small win game state, "2V2" is displayed (stopped display, confirmed stopped) in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 as a small win combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the display result being "small win". On the other hand, as shown in Figure 9-25 (20), in the start screen of the presentation mode (in this example, [normal mode]) controlled after the end of the small win game state, "222", which is a big win combination of decorative symbols, is displayed as a combination of decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5.

[Example of power cut during a small win and a small win break after power recovery]
Next, examples of the presentation when a power outage occurs during a small win game and when a small win failure occurs after power is restored will be explained using Figures 9-26 to 9-27.

Figure 9-26 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to when a power outage occurs during a small win game and when a small win break occurs after recovery, and Figure 9-27 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image related to when a power outage occurs during a small win game and when a small win break occurs after recovery.

In this example, a power outage occurs in the controlled small win game state when in [Hyper Rush Mode], and a small win failure occurs again in the controlled small win game state after the power is turned on.

First, as shown in FIG. 9-27(1), when the CPU 103 starts the small win game state (period T1 to T2 shown in FIG. 9-26), the presentation control CPU 120 executes the first promotion presentation (in this example, the first promotion blinking presentation, the promotion sound effect presentation, and the first promotion image presentation), causes the V-judgment winning device LED 87L to blink (light up) in rainbow colors (seven colors) at a blinking cycle of 0.5 seconds, causes the speakers 8L and 8R to play and output promotion sound effects, and causes the image display device 5 to display the first promotion image (first arrow image 09TM11A, the text "Aim for V", and the time gauge image 09TM11T). At this time, an image in the middle of an animation operation (the first arrow image displayed in the entire center of the screen) is displayed as the first arrow image 09TM11A of the first promotion image.

Next, at the timing T2 shown in FIG. 9-26, a power outage occurs while the machine is controlled to a small win gaming state, and the power is turned on at the timing T3 shown in FIG. 9-26.

At this time, since the game state when the power outage occurred was a small win game state, a special combination of decorative symbols (in this example, "135") will be displayed as the decorative symbol combination (initial result) in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the recovery start screen (the screen shown in Figure 9-27 (2)) after the power is turned on.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-27(2), after the power is restored, the CPU 103 controls the game state to the small win game state that was the game state when the power failure occurred (at the timing of T3 shown in FIG. 9-26), and the presentation control CPU 120, which has received the game state designation command at the time of restoration, executes a restoration notification presentation, displays a restoration display 09TM70 (in this example, an image including the text "Power failure restoration in progress") on the entire screen of the image display device 5, and executes a second promotion presentation (in this example, a second promotion flashing presentation, a second promotion image presentation), causes the V-determination winning device LED 87L to flash (emit) red (one color) at a flashing cycle of 2 seconds, and displays a second promotion image (a second arrow image 09TM12A, the text "Please put the ball into the V") on the image display device 5.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays each performance image (decorative symbol (in this example, the special combination of decorative symbols "135" as the initial result), small symbol (in this example, "135"), first reserved memory count (in this example, "0"), second reserved memory count display area (in this example, "0"), etc.) and background image (in this example, a sunny background image) based on receiving the performance control commands (customer waiting demo designation command, background designation command, etc.) when power is restored. However, the recovery display is an image with a higher display priority than the various performance images (it appears to be displayed in front because it has a higher display layer). This makes it difficult to view the various performance images.

In this example, the execution period of the recovery notification effect is determined to be "0.5 seconds" based on the fact that the remaining small win period at the time of power recovery is 0.5 seconds or more (e.g., 3 seconds) (see Figure 9-21).

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-27(3), when 0.5 seconds, which is the execution period of the recovery notification effect, has elapsed (timing T4 shown in FIG. 9-26), the effect control CPU 120 ends the recovery notification effect and erases the recovery display 09TM70 (in this example, an image including the text "Power outage being restored") from the entire screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the second promotion effect (in this example, the second promotion blinking effect, the second promotion image effect), blinks (lights up) the V-judging winning device LED 87L in red (one color) at a blinking cycle of 2 seconds, and displays the second promotion image (the second arrow image 09TM12A, the text "Put the ball in the V") on the image display device 5.

At this time, the recovery notification display ends, and the recovery display 09TM70 (in this example, an image containing the words "Power outage being restored") is erased from the entire screen of the image display device 5, making it possible to view each of the display images (decorative pattern, small pattern, first reserved memory count display area, second reserved memory count display area, etc.) and the background image (in this example, a sunny background image).

In this way, after the recovery display is displayed to notify that power has been restored from the power outage, the background image and decorative patterns corresponding to [normal mode] can be displayed instantly even during small win play, so the player can understand that they should aim (hit to the right) at the V-determination winning device 87 in order to achieve a V win (win in the V winning area 870), reducing the possibility of a small win blowout occurring during small win play and preventing the player from being at a disadvantage.

Next, at the timing when the CPU 103 should end the small win game state (timing T5 shown in Figure 9-26), the presentation control CPU 120, which has received the small win end designation command, ends the second promotion presentation (in this example, the second promotion flashing presentation and the second promotion image presentation), ends the flashing (light emission) of the V-determination winning device LED 87L, and erases the second promotion image from the image display device 5.

At this time, the presentation control CPU 120 determines in the presentation decision process at the end of the small win (see Figure 9-16) that a special combination of decorative symbols will be displayed as the combination of decorative symbols to be displayed after the end of the small win game (step S09TM3080).

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-27 (4), at the timing when the small win ending period ends (timing T6 shown in FIG. 9-26), the presentation control CPU 120 controls the presentation mode to [normal mode (sunny mode)] and displays the special combination of decorative symbols (in this example, "135") determined in the small win end presentation determination process in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The rest is the same as FIG. 9-25 (20), so explanations are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 9-27(3), the game state when the power failure occurs is a small win game state, so a special combination of decorative symbols (in this example, "135") is displayed as the combination of decorative symbols (initial result) on the recovery start screen after the power is turned on, and as shown in FIG. 9-27(4), a small win break occurs during a small win game when the power failure and power is turned on during a small win game, and based on the occurrence of the small win break, the special combination of decorative symbols (in this example, "135") is displayed as the combination of decorative symbols on the start screen of the presentation mode [normal mode (sunny mode)] that is controlled after the end of the small win game without being controlled to a big win game state. Therefore, in FIG. 9-27(3) and (4), a common special combination of decorative symbols is displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and it appears to the player that the common special combination of decorative symbols is continuously displayed.

As shown in FIG. 9-27(4), by displaying a special combination of decorative symbols (in this example, "135") in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the player can clearly recognize that the current game state control situation is when a power outage occurs during a small win game state, and the game machine is controlled to the normal state without winning a V during the small win game state after the power is turned on. Also, for example, when the game store is closed while the game machine is controlled to a small win, if the game store is shut down during the small win and the power is restored before the opening of business the next day, the small win will naturally continue. In such a situation, the small win will be blocked in the game store that is closed, so if the number of consecutive numbers indicating a big win stops after this blockage, there is a risk that the player will be misled after the store opens, but if the special combination stops as in this example, the player will not feel strange.

[Normal performance mode (variation)]
In the above embodiment, when the presentation mode is controlled from [Challenge Mode] or [Rush Mode] to [Normal Mode] (after the time-saving feature has ended), it is controlled to [Normal Mode (Sunny Mode)] within [Normal Mode], and thereafter, when the presentation mode is controlled to [Normal Mode], if it is possible to switch the presentation mode, it is possible to switch to various presentation modes including [Normal Mode (Sunny Mode)] ([Normal Mode (Sunny Mode)], [Normal Mode (Cloudy Mode], [Normal Mode (Rainy Mode)]). However, without being limited to this form, when the presentation mode is controlled to [Normal Mode] after the time-saving feature has ended, if it is possible to switch the presentation mode, a presentation mode of [Normal Mode] that cannot be switched may be set.

For example, set [Normal mode (revenge mode)] from [Normal mode]. When the presentation mode is controlled to [Normal mode (revenge mode)], the presentation control CPU 120 will display a "volcano background image" showing a volcanic landscape including a volcano as the background image for the decorative pattern.

This [normal mode (revenge mode)] presentation mode is always controlled when the presentation mode is controlled from [challenge mode] or [rush mode] to [normal mode] via a time-saving exit. In other words, [normal mode (revenge mode)] is set as the fixed presentation mode that is controlled after the time-saving exit. After that, when the presentation mode is controlled to [normal mode], if it is possible to switch presentation modes at a specific trigger (for example, the end of 20 variable displays after the time-saving exit), it is possible to switch to various presentation modes that do not include [normal mode (revenge mode)] ([normal mode (sunny mode)], [normal mode (cloudy mode)], [normal mode (rainy mode)]), but it is not possible to switch to [normal mode (revenge mode)].

When the above embodiment is applied, when the presentation mode is controlled from [Challenge Mode], [Rush Mode], or [Hyper Rush Mode] to [Normal Mode] via a small hit puncture, a fixed presentation mode different from [Normal Mode (Revenge Mode)] may be set.

For example, when the display is controlled to [normal mode] via a time-saving exit, [normal mode (revenge mode)] is set as the fixed presentation mode. After that, at a predetermined trigger (for example, the end of 20 variable displays after the time-saving exit), it is possible to switch to various presentation modes ([normal mode (sunny mode)], [normal mode (cloudy mode)], [normal mode (rainy mode)]). On the other hand, when the display is controlled to [normal mode] via a small hit break, [normal mode (sunny mode)] is set as the fixed presentation mode.

[Game flow (modified example)]
In a modified example of the game flow shown in Figure 9-28, a jackpot occurs when the presentation mode is [normal mode], and after the jackpot game state ends, the game is controlled to a time-saving state (low probability/high base state), and transitions to [Challenge mode] (time-saving 1 spin + reserved 4 spins) or [Hyper rush mode] (time-saving 99 spins + reserved 4 spins), and if a jackpot occurs, transitions to [Rush mode] (time-saving 7 spins + reserved 4 spins) or [Hyper rush mode] (time-saving 99 spins + reserved 4 spins), and transitions to [normal mode] if a jackpot does not occur.

(1) When the game state is controlled to the normal state (low probability/low base state) and the first flag, the second flag, and the third flag are not set, the presentation mode is set to [normal mode]. (1D) As an example of a presentation when the presentation mode is [normal mode (revenge mode)], a volcano background image is displayed on the image display device 5 as a background image for a decorative pattern.

In state (3), when one variable display in the time-saving state in which all display results are "misses" and the pending memory (variable displays whose execution is pending (up to four in this example)) corresponding to the start winning that occurred at this time is executed, control is made to state (1). In this example, when controlled from state (3) to state (1), control is made to state (1D) (presentation mode is [normal mode (revenge mode)]).

In state (4), when seven variable displays in the time-saving state in which all display results are "misses" and the reserved memory (variable displays whose execution is reserved (up to four in this example)) corresponding to the start winning that occurs at this time are executed, control is made to state (1). In this example, when controlled from state (4) to state (1), control is made to state (1D) (presentation mode is [normal mode (revenge mode)]).
The rest is the same as in FIG. 9-6, so the explanation will be omitted.

(Means 09-1)
As shown in Fig. 9-24 (15) and (16), in the variable display executed immediately before the control to the small win game state, "2V2" is displayed (stopped display, fixed stop) in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 as a small win combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the display result being "small win". On the other hand, as shown in Fig. 9-25 (20), in the start screen of the [normal mode] of the normal state controlled after the occurrence of a small win break in the small win game state, "222", which is a big win combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the small win combination of decorative symbols "2V2", is displayed as a combination of decorative symbols in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5.

According to this configuration, by displaying the combination of decorative symbols "222", which is a combination for a big win, as a combination of decorative symbols in the normal state (presentation mode is [normal mode]) which is controlled after a small win break occurs in the small win game state, the player can be made aware in the normal state (presentation mode is [normal mode]) that a small win break has occurred in the small win game state and that the game has been controlled to the normal state (presentation mode is [normal mode]), unlike when the display result is "miss" in the variable display of the specified number of time-saving controls and all of the reserved memories stored during the time-saving state and the game is controlled to the normal state (presentation mode is [normal mode]).

(Means 09-2)
As shown in step S09TM1070 of FIG. 9-9, when the presentation mode is either [Challenge Mode], [Rush Mode], or [Hyper Rush Mode], if the display result is a "small win" (YES in step S09TM1060), the presentation control CPU 120 determines the combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed when the variable display ends based on the [second special symbol] decorative symbol combination determination table for a big win (small win) (see FIG. 9-10 (B2)). That is, in the processing of step S09TM1070, a "decorative symbol combination for a big win" and a "decorative symbol combination for a small win" are simultaneously determined as the combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed when the variable display ends.

With this configuration, when a small win break occurs during a small win game state, it is sufficient to display a combination of decorative symbols that was determined in advance, and there is no need to perform complex presentation control, which reduces the processing burden associated with presentation control when a small win break occurs.

(Means 09-3)
As described above, in the processing of step S09TM1070 of FIG. 9-9, a "combination of decorative symbols for a big win" and a "combination of decorative symbols for a small win" are simultaneously determined as the combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed when the variable display ends.

As shown in FIG. 9-16, in the small win end presentation determination process executed at the end of the small win game state before being controlled to the presentation mode of the [normal mode] among the normal states controlled after a small win break occurs in the small win game state, the presentation control CPU 120 predetermines that a combination of decorative symbols for a big win will be displayed as the combination of decorative symbols to be displayed after the small win game ends (step S09TM3040).

As shown in Fig. 9-25 (17) to (20), when the control is made to the [normal mode] after the occurrence of a small win break, the performance control CPU 120 erases the first promotion image (first arrow image 09TM11A, the text "Aim for the V", and the time gauge image 09TM11T) from the image display device 5, and based on the fact that (A) the combination for a big win of decorative symbols and (B) that the combination for a big win of decorative symbols will be displayed in the [normal mode] after the end of the small win game, displays the combination for a big win of decorative symbols (in this example, "222") in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and displays a clear sky background image 09TM60A as the background image of the decorative symbols.

With this configuration, when a small win break occurs during a small win game state, a combination of decorative symbols determined in advance can be displayed together with a background image, thereby reducing the processing burden associated with controlling the presentation when a small win break occurs. Also, when a small win break occurs, the first promotion image for instantly winning a V is erased and a presentation image (decorative symbols, background image, etc.) corresponding to [normal mode] is displayed, thereby suppressing the player's disappointment when a small win break occurs and directing the player's attention to playing in normal state.

(Means 09-4)
As shown in FIG. 9-6, in the states (3) and (4), when the variable display of the specified number of times in the time-saving state in which all display results are "misses" and the reserved memory corresponding to the start winning that occurred at this time are executed (after the time-saving end), the state is controlled to (1A) (presentation mode is [normal mode (sunny mode)]). That is, after the time-saving end, a sunny background image is displayed on the image display device 5 as the background image of the decorative pattern. As shown in FIG. 9-25 (20), when the control is made to [normal mode] after a small win break occurs, a sunny background image is displayed on the image display device 5 as the background image of the decorative pattern. Therefore, when the time-saving state is not controlled to the small win game state and the game is controlled to the normal state without winning a V during the small win game state (when the time-saving end occurs), a common sunny background image is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern.

With this configuration, there is no need to change the background image depending on the situation when controlled to the normal state, and the processing burden of controlling the presentation when controlled to the normal state can be reduced. Also, regardless of the situation when controlled to the normal state, a common background image is displayed as the background image for the decorative pattern, so even when controlled to [normal mode] after a small hit break occurs, the presentation is the same as after the time-saving feature ends, reducing the player's disappointment.

(Means 09-5)
As shown in [Normal Presentation Mode (Variation)], when the display is controlled to the [Normal Mode] via the time-saving feature, the [Normal Mode (Revenge Mode)] is set as the fixed presentation mode. After that, at a predetermined opportunity (for example, when 20 variable displays have been completed after the time-saving feature), it is possible to switch to various presentation modes ([Normal Mode (Sunny Mode)], [Normal Mode (Cloudy Mode)], [Normal Mode (Rainy Mode)]). On the other hand, when the display is controlled to the [Normal Mode] via a small hit break, the [Normal Mode (Sunny Mode)] is set as the fixed presentation mode.

That is, when the display is controlled to the [normal mode] after the time-saving feature is released, the volcano background image is displayed as a fixed background image. After that, at a predetermined opportunity (for example, after the display changes 20 times after the time-saving feature is released), the background image can be switched to a sunny background image, a cloudy background image, or a rainy background image.
On the other hand, when the game is controlled to [normal mode] via a small hit puncture, a sunny background image different from the volcano background image is displayed as the fixed background image.

According to this configuration, when the game is controlled to [normal mode] via a time-saving exit, a special background image (a volcano background image) from [normal mode] is displayed, allowing the player to clearly recognize that the time-saving state has ended. In addition, a special background image with a higher level of presentation than the normal background image is displayed, encouraging the player to continue playing. On the other hand, when the game is controlled to [normal mode] via a small win break, a normal background image (a sunny background image) with a more subdued presentation than the special background image from [normal mode] is displayed, preventing the player from feeling more disappointed.

(Means 09-6)
As shown in Figures 9-11, the performance control CPU 120 executes a pattern stop action performance in which the character of the decorative pattern (in this example, consisting of a number pattern or an English letter pattern and a character) performs an action (in this example, enlarging or moving) at the timing when the decorative pattern should be stopped and displayed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, as a performance that is executed when the display result of the ongoing variable display is a "big hit" or a "small hit".

As shown in step S09TM1040 of FIG. 9-9, when the presentation mode is [normal mode], the pattern stop action presentation can be executed, and as shown in step S09TM1080 of FIG. 9-9, when the presentation mode is either [challenge mode], [rush mode], or [hyper rush mode], the pattern stop action presentation can be executed. In other words, regardless of the presentation mode, the pattern stop action presentation can be executed.

As shown in FIG. 9-25 (20), after a small win break occurs, the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation controls the presentation mode to [normal mode (sunny mode)], and displays the combination of decorative symbols for a big win (in this example, "222") determined in the presentation determination process at the end of the small win in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. At this time, the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation does not execute the symbol stop action presentation, and the character of the decorative symbol does not perform any action.

According to such a configuration, the interest in the game can be increased by executing a symbol stopping action presentation in the variable display where the display result is a "big win" or a "small win."
On the other hand, when the reel is controlled to the "normal mode" via a small win break, the symbol stopping action presentation is not executed, thereby preventing the player from misunderstanding the character's actions even when no event advantageous to the player has occurred, which would then increase the player's disappointment.

(Means 09-7)
As shown in Figures 9-11, the performance control CPU 120 executes a pattern stop sound performance in which a pattern stop sound effect is played back and output from speakers 8L, 8R at the timing when the decorative patterns should be stopped and displayed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, as a performance that is executed when the display result of the variable display currently being executed is a "big hit" or a "small hit."

As shown in step S09TM1040 of FIG. 9-9, when the presentation mode is [Normal Mode], the pattern stop sound presentation can be executed, and as shown in step S09TM1080 of FIG. 9-9, when the presentation mode is [Challenge Mode], [Rush Mode], or [Hyper Rush Mode], the pattern stop sound presentation can also be executed.
In other words, the symbol stop sound effect can be executed regardless of the presentation mode.

As shown in FIG. 9-25 (20), after a small win break occurs, the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation controls the presentation mode to [normal mode (sunny mode)] and displays the combination of decorative symbols for a big win (in this example, "222") determined in the presentation determination process at the end of the small win in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. At this time, the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation does not execute the symbol stop sound presentation, and does not play back or output the symbol stop sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R.

With this configuration, when the display result is a "big win" or "small win", the symbol stop sound effect is executed, which can increase the interest of the game. On the other hand, when the control is made to [normal mode] via a small win break, the symbol stop sound effect is not executed, which can prevent the player from misunderstanding that a symbol stop sound effect is executed even though no event advantageous to the player has occurred, which can increase the player's disappointment thereafter.

(Means 09-8)
As shown in Fig. 9-17, in the time-saving final variation display where the display result is "miss", at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variation display of the second special symbol (timing T1 shown in Fig. 9-17), the performance control CPU 120, which has received the symbol determination B designation command, displays the result display on the image display device 5. The timing when this time-saving final variation display ends is timing T2 or T5 shown in Fig. 9-7, and at this timing, control is exercised to the normal state. Therefore, when the time-saving state is controlled to the normal state without being controlled to the small win game state, the result display is displayed on the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 9-18, when the CPU 103 is to end control of the small win game state (timing T3 shown in FIG. 9-18), the presentation control CPU 120 receives the small win end command and displays the result display on the image display device 5 based on the result display flag being set. In addition, the presentation control CPU 120 continues to display the result display on the image display device 5 until the small win ending period (3 seconds) has elapsed and the CPU 103 starts the next variable display of the second special pattern (variable display corresponding to the first of the four reserved memories) (timing T4A shown in FIG. 9-18). Therefore, if there is no V winning during the small win game state and the game is controlled to the normal state, the result display is displayed on the image display device 5 during the small win ending period of the small win game state.

As shown in FIG. 9-16, in the process of determining the presentation at the end of a small win, if the V winning designation command is not received and the power failure recovery flag is set (when proceeding to the process after step S09TM3080), the process of setting the result display flag (step S09TM3070) is not executed, and therefore a power failure occurs during a small win game state, and if a V is not won during the small win game state after the power is turned on and control is exercised to the normal state, the result display flag is not set, and therefore when control is exercised to the normal state in the above situation, the result display is not displayed on the image display device 5.

With this configuration, when the game is controlled to the normal state after the time-saving feature has finished or when the game is controlled to the normal state via a small win break, the result display is displayed for a certain period of time on the image display device 5, allowing the player to accurately recognize information related to the number of big wins and the total number of prize balls awarded.

On the other hand, if a power outage occurs during a small win game state, and a small win failure occurs during the small win game state after the power is turned on and control is performed to the normal state, the result display is not displayed on the image display device 5, which can prevent the player's disappointment from increasing. Also, by adopting a configuration in which the presentation control to display the result display is not performed after a power outage occurs and the power is turned on, the processing burden of the presentation control can be reduced after power is turned on, when it is difficult for the presentation control CPU 120 to grasp the exact number of jackpots and the total number of prize balls awarded.

(Means 09-9)
As shown in Figure 9-17, in the final time-saving variation display where the display result is "miss," at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variation display of the second special pattern (timing T1 shown in Figure 9-17), the performance control CPU 120 receives the pattern determination B designation command and causes the image display device 5 to display the result display for the pattern determination period (10 seconds).

The result display is displayed on the image display device 5 for a total of 1.5 seconds, which is the period during which the pending memory changes and the display result is "miss" (1 second), and the period during which the pattern corresponding to that change is determined (0.5 seconds). Since the number of pending memories is 4, the result display is displayed on the image display device 5 for 1.5 x 4 = 6 seconds (the period from T2A to T6 shown in Figure 9-17).

As shown in FIG. 9-18, when the CPU 103 should end control of the small win game state (timing T3 shown in FIG. 9-18), the presentation control CPU 120 receives a small win end designation command and causes the image display device 5 to display the result display for the small win ending period (3 seconds). In other words, when the game is controlled to the small win game state, the display of the result display is started.

The result display is displayed on the image display device 5 for a total of 1.5 seconds, consisting of the variable display period (1 second) of the reserved memory where the display result is "miss" and the pattern determination period (0.5 seconds) corresponding to that variable display. As the number of reserved memories is 4, the result display is displayed on the image display device 5 for 1.5 x 4 = 6 seconds (the period T4A to T8 shown in Figure 9-18). In other words, the combined period of the variable display period and pattern determination period of these four reserved memories is the same length as the combined period of the variable display period and pattern determination period of the four reserved memories shown in Figure 9-17.

According to this configuration, when the game is controlled to the normal state after the time-saving feature has finished, the result display is displayed for a longer period of time than when the game is controlled to the normal state via a small win break, allowing the player to accurately recognize information related to the number of jackpots and the total number of prize balls awarded. Also, when the game is controlled to the normal state via a small win break, the result display is displayed on the image display device 5 during the small win ending period during the small win game state, allowing the player to recognize information related to the number of jackpots and the total number of prize balls awarded, thereby reducing the player's disappointment due to the small win break.

(Means 09-10)
As shown in [Variations regarding whether or not to display the result display], when a small hit break occurs in a small hit game corresponding to (B-1) the time-saving final variation display in which the display result is a "small hit" when the presentation mode is [Challenge mode] or [Rush mode], or (B-2) the time-saving variation display in which the display result is a "small hit" when the presentation mode is [Hyper Rush mode], the presentation control CPU 120 does not cause the result display to be displayed on the image display device 5.

This configuration prevents the player from being made aware of information about the actual number of jackpots or the total number of prize balls awarded, which are less than the number of jackpots the player would have received or the total number of prize balls that were expected to be awarded, thereby preventing a decline in interest.

(Means 09-11)
As shown in FIG. 9-7, seven variable displays are executed in the time-saving state, and when all display results are "misses," the CPU 103 controls the state from the time-saving state to the normal state (timing T5 shown in FIG. 9-7).

As shown in the <Pattern Confirmation Designation Command>, the "Pattern Confirmation B Designation Command" is a presentation control command that designates that the time-saving final variable display will end the variable display that results in a "miss" display, and that the pattern confirmation period is 10 seconds.

As shown in Figure 9-17, in the final time-saving variation display where the display result is "miss", the CPU 103 ends the variation display of the second special symbol (timing T1 shown in Figure 9-17), and the performance control CPU 120 receives the symbol determination B designation command. Based on the reception of the symbol determination B designation command, the CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display the result display.

With this configuration, the performance control CPU 120 can accurately recognize the timing to switch from the time-saving state to the normal state depending on whether or not it has received the pattern determination B designation command, and can also accurately recognize the execution timing of the result performance that displays the result display.

(Means 09-12)
As shown in Figure 9-18, at the timing when the CPU 103 should end control of the small hit game state (timing T3 shown in Figure 9-18), the presentation control CPU 120 receives a small hit end designation command and displays a result display on the image display device 5 based on the fact that it has received the small hit end designation command and that the result display flag has been set.

With this configuration, even in a situation where a small win break occurs, the presentation control CPU 120 can accurately recognize the execution timing of the result presentation that displays the result display based on whether or not a small win end designation command has been received and whether or not the result display flag has been set.

(Means 09-13)
As shown in Figure 9-19, at the timing (T4A shown in Figure 9-19) when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the next second special pattern (variable display corresponding to the first of the four reserved memories), the performance control CPU 120, which has received the variable pattern designation command, displays the result display on the image display device 5 based on the fact that it has received the variable pattern designation command and that the result display flag has been set.

With this configuration, even in a situation where a small win puncture occurs, the performance control CPU 120 can accurately recognize the execution timing of the result performance that displays the result display based on whether or not a variation pattern designation command has been received and whether or not the result display flag has been set.

(Means 09-14)
As shown in FIG. 9-16, in the small win end performance determination process, if the V winning designation command is not received and the power failure recovery flag is set, the performance control CPU 120 determines to display a special combination of decorative symbols as the combination of decorative symbols to be displayed after the small win game ends (step S09TM3080). This special combination of decorative symbols is a combination of decorative symbols exclusively for the recovery start screen during a small win game when a power failure and power on occurs during a small win game.

As shown in Figure 9-27 (4), at the timing when the small win ending period ends (timing T6 shown in Figure 9-26), the presentation control CPU 120 controls the presentation mode to [normal mode (sunny mode)] and displays the special combination of decorative symbols (in this example, "135") determined in the presentation determination process at the end of the small win in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

With this configuration, a special combination of decorative symbols (in this example, "135") is displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, allowing the player to clearly recognize that the current game state control status is when a power outage occurs during a small win game state, and the game is controlled to the normal state without a V being won during the small win game state after the power is turned on.

(Means 09-15)
As described above, the special combination of decorative symbols is a combination of decorative symbols that is different from the combination for losing the decorative symbols. In particular, the special combination of decorative symbols is a combination of decorative symbols that is different from the second combination for losing the decorative symbols that is in a reach state.

In this embodiment, where the reach state increases the likelihood that the display result will be a "big win" or "small win," this configuration prevents the player from feeling hopeful or disappointed when a power outage occurs during a small win game, and when control is returned to normal without a V being won during the small win game after the power is turned on, by not displaying the combination of decorative symbols that would result in a reach state.

(Means 09-16)
As shown in Figure 9-20, in the demo display performance decision process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the conditions for executing the customer waiting demo performance are met, and if the conditions for executing the customer waiting demo performance are met (YES in step S09TM4030), it decides to execute the customer waiting demo performance.

As shown in Figure 9-21 (A), when the power outage recovery flag is not set and the customer waiting time has elapsed for 60 seconds, condition No. "SP-01" is met and it is decided to execute the customer waiting demo performance, and when the power outage recovery flag is not set and the customer waiting time has elapsed for 10 seconds, condition No. "SP-02" is met and it is decided to execute the customer waiting demo performance.

With this configuration, on the start screen of the [normal mode], which is one of the normal states controlled after a small win break occurs, the period from when the combination of decorative symbols is displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 until the customer waiting demo performance is executed can be made different depending on whether or not a power outage occurred during the small win game state, and an appropriate period can be set as the period until the customer waiting demo performance is executed.

(Means 09-17)
As shown in FIG. 9-21(B), when the game state at the time of recovery is a small win game state, the execution period of the recovery notification effect is determined to be "0.5 seconds or less." When the game state at the time of recovery from a power outage is a small win game state, the execution period of the recovery notification effect is set to a period shorter than the remaining small win period, regardless of the remaining small win period. In other words, before the small win game state at the time of power outage recovery ends, the recovery notification effect ends, and the display of the recovery display also ends.

As shown in FIG. 9-27 (3), when 0.5 seconds, which is the execution period of the recovery notification presentation, has elapsed (timing T4 shown in FIG. 9-26), the presentation control CPU 120 ends the recovery notification presentation and erases the recovery display 09TM70 (in this example, an image containing the words "Power outage being restored") from the entire screen of the image display device 5.

At this time, the recovery notification display ends, and the recovery display 09TM70 (in this example, an image containing the words "Power outage being restored") is erased from the entire screen of the image display device 5, making it possible to view each of the display images (decorative pattern, small pattern, first reserved memory count display area, second reserved memory count display area, etc.) and the background image (in this example, a sunny background image).

With this configuration, after the recovery display is displayed to notify that power has been restored from the power outage, the background image and decorative patterns corresponding to [normal mode] can be displayed instantly even during small win play, so the player can understand that they should aim (hit to the right) at the V-judgment winning device 87 to achieve a V win (win in the V winning area 870), reducing the possibility of a small win blowout occurring during small win play and preventing the player from being at a disadvantage.

(Means 09-18)
As shown in Figures 9-12, in the process of determining the performance during a small win, if the power outage recovery flag is not set, it is decided to execute the first promotion performance, and if the power outage recovery flag is set, it is decided to execute the second promotion performance.

As shown in Figure 9-13, the first promotion flashing effect among the first promotion effects is an effect in which the V-judgment winning device LED87L flashes (lights) in rainbow colors (seven colors) with a flashing cycle of 0.5 seconds, and the second promotion flashing effect among the second promotion effects is an effect in which the V-judgment winning device LED87L flashes (lights) in red (one color) with a flashing cycle of 2 seconds.

In this embodiment, where a big win occurs when the game ball enters (V-winning) the V-winning area 870 inside the V-judgment winning device 87 during a small win game state, this configuration allows the V-winning determination device LED 87L provided on the V-judgment winning device 87 to blink (light up) during a small win game state, drawing attention to the V-judgment winning device 87 and instructing the player to aim (hit to the right) at the V-judgment winning device 87 in order to ensure a V-winning (winning in the V-winning area 870).

In addition, by executing a second promotional flashing effect, which is a different presentation style from the first promotional flashing effect, the player is notified that the situation is different from normal small win play, and the player can be instructed to aim at the V-determination winning device 87 (hit to the right) in order to achieve a V win (a win in the V winning area 870) in a presentation style that is more urgent than the first promotional flashing effect.

(Means 09-19)
As shown in Figure 9-13, the first promotion flashing effect among the first promotion effects is an effect in which the V-judgment winning device LED 87L flashes (lights up) at a flashing cycle of 0.5 seconds, and the second promotion flashing effect among the second promotion effects is an effect in which the V-judgment winning device LED 87L flashes (lights up) at a flashing cycle of 2 seconds.

With this configuration, the first promotion flashing effect is executed to instruct the player to aim (hit to the right) at the V-determination winning device 87 to achieve a V win (win in the V-winning area 870), and the excitement of the game during the small win game state can be increased. On the other hand, the second promotion flashing effect is executed to instruct the player to aim (hit to the right) at the V-determination winning device 87 to achieve a V win (win in the V-winning area 870), and the player can be made aware that the remaining period controlled to the small win game state is shortened and that there is a high urgency in aiming at the V-determination winning device 87.

(Means 09-20)
As shown in Figures 9-13, the first promotion flashing effect among the first promotion effects is an effect that causes the V-judgment winning device LED 87L to flash (light up) in rainbow colors (seven colors), and the second promotion flashing effect among the second promotion effects is an effect that causes the V-judgment winning device LED 87L to flash (light up) in red (one color).

With this configuration, the first promotion flashing effect is executed to instruct the player to aim (hit to the right) at the V-determination winning device 87 to achieve a V win (win in the V-winning area 870), and the interest of the game during the small win game state can be increased. On the other hand, the second promotion flashing effect is executed to instruct the player to aim (hit to the right) at the V-determination winning device 87 to achieve a V win (win in the V-winning area 870), and the player can be made aware that the remaining period controlled to the small win game state is shortened and that there is a high urgency in aiming at the V-determination winning device 87.

(Means 09-21)
As shown in Figures 9-13, the first promotional effect is an effect that is executed during a small win game, and includes a first promotional flashing effect among the promotional flashing effects, a promotional sound effect effect, and a first promotional image effect among the promotional image effects.

The first promotional flashing effect is an effect in which the V-determining winning device LED 87L flashes (lights up) in rainbow colors (7 colors) at a flashing cycle of 0.5 seconds. The promotional sound effect effect is an effect in which a promotional sound effect is played and output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The first promotional image effect is an effect in which a first promotion image is displayed on the image display device 5. This first promotion image is an image that includes a first arrow image in the center of the screen that instructs the player to hit to the right in order to win a V.

Also, as shown in Figure 9-13, the second promotion effect is an effect that is executed during a small win game, and includes the second promotion flashing effect among the promotion flashing effects and the second promotion image effect among the promotion image effects.

The second promotion flashing effect is an effect in which the V-determining winning device LED87L flashes (lights up) red (one color) at a flashing cycle of 2 seconds. The second promotion image effect is an effect in which a second promotion image is displayed on the image display device 5. This second promotion image is an image that includes a second arrow image in the center of the screen that instructs the player to hit to the right in order to win a V.

With this configuration, during a small win game state where no power interruption has occurred, the first promotion flashing effect is executed, instructing the player to aim (hit to the right) at the V-determining winning device 87 to achieve a V win (a win in the V winning area 870), and increasing the excitement of the game during the small win game state.

On the other hand, if a power outage occurs during a small win game state, and the second promotion flashing effect is executed during the small win game state after the power is turned on, even if the playback output control for the sound from speakers 8L and 8R is not activated, the player is instructed to aim (hit to the right) at the V-determination winning device 87 in order to achieve a V win (win in the V-win area 870), and the remaining period controlled to the small win game state is shortened, making the player aware of the high urgency of aiming at the V-determination winning device 87.

(Means 09-22)
As shown in Fig. 9-14, the first arrow image is a rainbow (seven-color) image that is a moving image that performs an animation action. As shown in Fig. 9-15, the second arrow image is a white (single-color) image that is a still image that does not perform an animation action.

With this configuration, during a small win game state where no power interruption has occurred, the first arrow image is displayed to instruct the player to aim (hit to the right) at the V-judgment winning device 87 to achieve a V win (win in the V winning area 870), and to increase the interest of the player during the small win game state.

On the other hand, if a power outage occurs during a small win game state, and the power is turned on while in the small win game state, the second arrow image is displayed to instruct the player to aim (hit to the right) at the V-determination winning device 87 to achieve a V win (win in the V-win area 870), and to make the player aware that the remaining period controlled to the small win game state is getting shorter and that there is a high urgency in aiming at the V-determination winning device 87.

(Means 09-23)
As shown in Fig. 9-14, the first arrow image is a rainbow (seven-color) image that is a moving image that performs an animation action. As shown in Fig. 9-15, the second arrow image is a white (single-color) image that is a still image that does not perform an animation action.
Therefore, the second arrow image has lower visibility in terms of display color and animation action (presence or absence of action, display range, etc.) than the first arrow image.

With this configuration, during a small win game state where no power interruption has occurred, the first arrow image is displayed to instruct the player to aim (hit to the right) at the V-judgment winning device 87 to achieve a V win (win in the V winning area 870), and to increase the interest of the player during the small win game state.

On the other hand, if a power outage occurs during a small win game state, and the power is turned on while in the small win game state, the second arrow image is displayed to instruct the player to aim (hit to the right) at the V-determination winning device 87 to achieve a V win (win in the V-win area 870), and to make the player aware that the remaining period controlled to the small win game state is getting shorter and that there is a high urgency in aiming at the V-determination winning device 87.

[Other Modifications]
(1) In the above embodiment, when a small hit break occurs in a small hit game state controlled while being controlled in [Challenge mode] or [Rush mode], if the remaining number of time-saving controls is 1 or more, the game continues to be controlled to the time-saving state and is controlled to the presentation mode when a small hit occurs. However, the present invention is not limited to this form. When a small hit break occurs in a small hit game state controlled while being controlled in [Challenge mode] or [Rush mode], even if the remaining number of time-saving controls is 1 or more, the game may be controlled from the time-saving state to the normal state and the presentation mode may be controlled to [normal mode].

(2) In the above embodiment, when a small hit break occurs in a small hit game state controlled while controlled in [Hyper Rush Mode], an example is shown in which control is not performed to the time-saving state but to [Normal Mode]. However, this is not limited to the above. Even if a small hit break occurs in a small hit game state controlled while controlled in [Hyper Rush Mode], if the remaining number of time-saving controls is 1 or more, control may continue to be performed to the time-saving state and may also be performed to [Hyper Rush Mode].

(3) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the pattern stop action effect and the pattern stop sound effect are executed 100% when the display result is a "big win" or a "small win", but this is not limited to the above, and the pattern stop action effect and the pattern stop sound effect may be executed at a rate different from 100% when the display result is a "big win" or a "small win".

For example, the execution rate of the pattern stop action effect and the pattern stop sound effect may be varied depending on the type of jackpot. When the jackpot type is a "pattern 10R time-saving jackpot" or a "small jackpot via 11 (10)R time-saving jackpot", the pattern stop action effect and the pattern stop sound effect are executed 90% of the time, and when the jackpot type is a "pattern 3R time-saving jackpot", a "small jackpot via 6 (5)R time-saving jackpot", or a "small jackpot via 4 (3)R time-saving jackpot", the pattern stop action effect and the pattern stop sound effect are executed 50% of the time.

(4) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which when the display result is a "big win" or a "small win", the pattern stop action effect and the pattern stop sound effect are executed at a rate of 100% regardless of the presentation mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this form, and when the display result is a "big win" or a "small win", the pattern stop action effect and the pattern stop sound effect may be executed at a rate different from 100% depending on the presentation mode.

For example, when the presentation mode is controlled to [Normal mode], the symbol stop action presentation and symbol stop sound presentation are executed 90% of the time, and when the presentation mode is controlled to [Challenge mode], [Rush mode], or [Hyper rush mode], the symbol stop action presentation and symbol stop sound presentation are executed 50% of the time.

(5) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the presentation mode is controlled to [normal mode (sunny mode)] after a small win break occurs, and when a combination for a big win of decorative symbols is displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, no pattern stopping action presentation or pattern stopping sound presentation is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this form, and when the presentation mode is controlled to [normal mode (sunny mode)] after a small win break occurs, and when a combination for a big win of decorative symbols is displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, a pattern stopping action presentation or pattern stopping sound presentation may be executed.

For example, the symbol stop motion effect that is executed when the effect mode is controlled to [normal mode (sunny mode)] after a small hit break occurs and a combination of decorative symbols for a big hit is displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is called a "special symbol stop motion effect." This special symbol stop motion effect may be an effect in which the character of the decorative symbol performs an action that is smaller than that of the symbol stop motion effect, or may be an effect in which the character performs an action that is larger than that of the symbol stop motion effect. In addition, the execution period of this special symbol stop motion effect may be an execution period that is shorter than that of the symbol stop motion effect, or may be an execution period that is longer than that of the symbol stop motion effect.

In addition, the symbol stop sound effect that is executed when the effect mode is controlled to [normal mode (sunny mode)] after a small win break occurs and a combination of decorative symbols for a big win is displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is referred to as a "special symbol stop sound effect." This special symbol stop sound effect is an effect in which sound effects are played and output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and may be an effect in which sound effects are played and output at a volume lower than that of the symbol stop sound effect, or may be an effect in which sound effects are played and output at a volume higher than that of the symbol stop sound effect. In addition, the execution period of the special symbol stop sound effect may be an execution period shorter than that of the symbol stop sound effect, or may be an execution period longer than that of the symbol stop sound effect.

(6) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which a power interruption occurs during a small win game, and the "special combination of decorative symbols" when the game is controlled to the normal state without a V winning during the small win game after the power is turned on is different from the "initial combination of decorative symbols" when a power interruption occurs during a game state other than a small win game state and the power is turned on, but this is not limited to the above, and the "special combination of decorative symbols" and the "initial combination of decorative symbols" may be the same.

For example, both the "special combination of decorative patterns" and the "initial combination of decorative patterns" may be a combination of decorative patterns common to the "special combination of decorative patterns" (such as "135"), or may be a combination of decorative patterns common to the "initial combination of decorative patterns" (such as "123").

(7) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the game state was controlled from the time-saving state to the normal state when the time-saving final fluctuation display ended, but the present invention is not limited to this form. The game state may be controlled from the time-saving state to the normal state at a timing different from the timing when the time-saving final fluctuation display ended.

For example, when the final time-saving fluctuation display starts, the game state is controlled from the time-saving state to the normal state.

(8) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which decorative images, background images, active displays, and other presentation images were displayed on the start screen of the [normal mode] of the normal state that is controlled after a small hit break occurs in a small hit game state, but this is not limited to the above, and a presentation image different from the various presentation images may be displayed on the start screen of the [normal mode] of the normal state that is controlled after a small hit break occurs in a small hit game state.

For example, on the start screen of the [normal mode], which is one of the normal states controlled after a small hit break occurs during a small hit game state, a promotion image (such as an image containing the text "Please return to left hit") that encourages a left hit to win in the first starting winning slot, and an image that notifies the player that the presentation mode has shifted to [normal mode] (such as an image containing the text "Entering sunny mode").

(9) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which both the pattern stopping action presentation and the pattern stopping sound presentation were executed when the display result was a "big win" or a "small win", but this is not limited to the above, and at least one of the pattern stopping action presentation and the pattern stopping sound presentation may be executed when the display result is a "big win" or a "small win".

For example, when the display result is a "big win" or a "small win" and the presentation mode is [normal mode], both the pattern stopping action presentation and the pattern stopping sound presentation are executed, and when the display result is a "big win" or a "small win" and the presentation mode is a presentation mode other than [normal mode], only the pattern stopping action presentation is executed.

(10) In the above embodiment, when a variable display that results in a "small win" is executed, an example is shown in which a "decorative symbol combination for a big win" and a "decorative symbol combination for a small win" are simultaneously determined as the combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed at the end of the variable display in the variable start performance determination process executed at the start of the variable display. However, the present invention is not limited to this form. When a variable display that results in a "small win" is executed, a "decorative symbol combination for a big win" may be determined as the combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed at the end of the variable display at a timing different from the start of the variable display.

For example, when a variable display that results in a "small win" is executed, the process of determining the effect at the start of the variable determines a "combination of decorative symbols for a small win" as the combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed at the end of the variable display, and determines a "combination of decorative symbols for a big win" that corresponds to the previously determined "combination of decorative symbols for a small win" at the timing of the end of the variable, the timing of the start of the small win game state, or a specified timing during the small win game state.

(11) In the above embodiment, (A) an example in which a result display is displayed on the image display device 5 at the timing when a small win end designation command is received, and (B) an example in which a result display is displayed on the image display device 5 at the timing when a variation pattern designation command is received are shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and examples (A) and (B) may be applied depending on the game situation.

For example, if there is pending memory at the end of the final time-saving fluctuation, (B) the result display will be displayed on the image display device 5 at the timing when the fluctuation pattern designation command is received, and if there is no pending memory at the end of the final time-saving fluctuation, (A) the result display will be displayed on the image display device 5 at the timing when the small win end designation command is received.

(12) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which when the game state at the time of recovery is a small win game state, the execution period of the recovery notification presentation is shorter than when the game state at the time of recovery is a game state other than a small win game state. However, the present invention is not limited to this form, and the execution period of the recovery notification presentation may be set according to the game state at the time of recovery.

For example, if the game state at the time of recovery is a small win game state, the execution period of the recovery notification effect is set to 0.5 seconds or less, if the game state at the time of recovery is a big win game state, the execution period of the recovery notification effect is set to 0.5 seconds or less, and if the game state at the time of recovery is a normal state excluding the small win game state and the big win game state, or a time-saving state excluding the small win game state, the execution period of the recovery notification effect is set to 1 second.

(13) In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the execution period of the recovery notification effect is set to a period shorter than the remaining small win period when the game state at the time of recovery is a small win game state, but the present invention is not limited to this form. When the game state at the time of recovery is a small win game state, the execution period of the recovery notification effect may be set to a period longer than the remaining small win period.

For example, if the game state at the time of recovery is a small win game state, the execution period of the recovery notification effect is set to 10 seconds. At this time, if the remaining small win period is shorter than 10 seconds, the recovery notification effect ends after the small win game state ends.

(14) In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the second promotion effect is executed when the power is restored after a power outage, and various performance images (decorative patterns, background images, etc.) are displayed (become visible) when the display of the recovery display ends. However, the present invention is not limited to this form. When the power is restored after a power outage, the second promotion effect is executed, and even if the display of the recovery display ends, various performance images (decorative patterns, background images, etc.) do not have to be displayed (they may become difficult to see).

For example, the second promotion image effect of the second promotion effect is an effect in which the second promotion image is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5. This second promotion image is a black image displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5, and includes a second arrow image in the center of the screen instructing the player to hit to the right in order to win the V, and the words "Please put the ball in the V" in the lower center of the screen.

In this case, when the power is restored after the power outage, the second promotion effect is being executed, and even if the display of the recovery display ends, the various effect images (decorative designs, background images, etc.) are difficult to see, and only information encouraging a right hit is displayed. This allows the player to understand that he or she should aim at the V-judgment winning device 87 (make a right hit) to achieve a V win (a win in the V winning area 870), thereby further enhancing the effect of reducing the possibility of a small win blowout occurring in a small win game and preventing the player from being at a disadvantage.

(11) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the V prize determination device and the large prize opening were different devices, but this is not limited to the above, and the V prize determination device and the large prize opening may be a common device.

The characteristic part 09TM described above includes the following configurations:

The gaming machine according to the means 09-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that executes variable display (variable display),
A variable means (V-judgment winning device 87) that controls the game medium (game ball) to enter into an entry-enabling state;
The game machine includes a state control means (CPU 103) capable of controlling a favorable state (big win game state) favorable to a player, a special state (small win game state) which is a state different from the favorable state and in which the variable means is controlled to the entry-enabling state, and a special state (time-saving state) which is a game state controlled after the favorable state and in which the variable display is executed more frequently than in a normal state,
The state control means (CPU 103)
When the game medium that has entered the variable means passes through a specific area (V winning area 870), it can be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the special state while being controlled to the special state, it can be controlled to the normal state (when a small win occurs in the time-saving state after the big win with the time-saving control of 99 times, and no V is won during the small win game, it is controlled to the normal state when the small win game state ends),
A display control means (performance control CPU 120) is provided that can display the display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information on a display means (image display device 5);
The display control means
When the player is controlled to the normal state, a specific display result (a combination of decorative symbols for a big win (e.g., "333")) can be displayed on the display means as the display result in response to the player being controlled to the advantageous state,
When the player is controlled to the special state, a special display result (a combination for a small win of decorative symbols (such as "3V3")) can be displayed on the display means as the display result in response to being controlled to the special state,
When the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the special state in the case where the game medium is controlled to the special state, the specific display result can be displayed on the display means in the normal state after the special state (when the game medium is controlled to the normal state without winning a V during a small win game, a combination for a big win of decorative symbols (such as "333") is displayed on the image display device 5).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this configuration, a specific display result is displayed in the normal state after the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the special state, thereby allowing the player to recognize that he or she has been controlled in the special state.

The gaming machine according to the means 09-2 is
The gaming machine according to the means 09-1,
A determination means (a process for determining a display result) for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state);
A display result determination means for determining the specific display result based on the determination that the control is to be performed in the advantageous state (processing of step S09TM1070 for determining a combination for a big win of decorative symbols),
The determination means determines whether or not to control to the special state (small win gaming state),
The display result determination means is capable of determining the special display result and the specific display result based on the determination that the special state is to be controlled when the special state is being controlled (in the process of step S09TM1070, determining a combination for a small win of the decorative symbols and a combination for a big win of the decorative symbols);
The display control means (performance control CPU 120) is capable of displaying, on the display means, the specific display result determined by the display result determination means in the normal state following the special state when the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the special state while being controlled to the special state (when a V is not won during a small win game and the normal state is controlled, the big win combination of decorative symbols determined in the processing of step S09TM1070 is displayed on the image display device 5).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, when the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the special state under control of the special state, it is only necessary to display the specific display result that has been determined, and since there is no need to perform complex presentation control, the processing burden of the presentation control can be reduced.

The gaming machine according to the means 09-3 is
A gaming machine according to the means 09-1 or 09-2,
The display control means (the performance control CPU 120) is capable of displaying on the display means a predetermined launch display (a first promotion image including a first arrow image, and a second promotion image including a second arrow image) that prompts the player to launch the game medium into a predetermined area when the display control means is controlled to the special state (small win game state);
When the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the special state under control of the special state, the predetermined launch display is made non-displayed, and a normal background image corresponding to the normal state is displayed on the display means as a background image for the decorative identification information, and the specific display result is displayed on the display means (when a V is not won during a small win game and the game is controlled to the normal state, the first promotion image is erased, and a sunny background image corresponding to the [normal mode (sunny mode)] of the normal state is displayed as a background image, and a combination for a big win of decorative patterns (such as "222") is displayed).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, when the game medium does not pass through a specific area in a special state under control of a special state, it is sufficient to display a specific display result together with a normal background image, and since there is no need to perform complex presentation control, the processing burden of presentation control can be reduced.

The gaming machine according to the means 09-4 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means 09-1 to 09-3,
The display control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the display device is controlled to the normal state, the display device can display, as a background image of the decoration identification information, any one of a plurality of types of normal background images (such as a sunny background image, a cloudy background image, a rainy background image, etc., corresponding to a "normal mode" among the normal states),
A common normal background image can be displayed on the display means when a variable display is executed and the game medium is controlled from the special state to the normal state without being controlled to the special state, and when the game medium is controlled from the special state to the normal state without passing through the specific area in the special state (a common sunny background image is displayed when the game medium is controlled from the time-saving state to the normal state without being controlled to the small win game state, and when the game medium is controlled to the normal state without winning a V during a small win game).
A gaming machine characterized by:
With this configuration, there is no need to change the background image depending on the situation when controlled to the normal state, and the processing burden of performance control can be reduced.

The gaming machine according to the means 09-5 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means 09-1 to 09-4,
The display control means (performance control CPU 120)
When variable display is executed and the game is controlled from the special state to the normal state without being controlled to the special state, a special background image can be displayed on the display means, and after the special background image is displayed for a predetermined period of time, a normal background image can be displayed on the display means (when the game is controlled from the time-saving state to the normal state without being controlled to the small win game state, a volcano background image is displayed for 20 variations, and then a sunny background image, a cloudy background image, or a rainy background image is displayed).
When the game medium is controlled from the special state to the normal state without passing through the specific area in the special state, the normal background image can be displayed on the display means without displaying the special background image on the display means (when the game medium is controlled to the normal state without winning a V during a small win game, a sunny background image, a cloudy background image, or a rainy background image is displayed without displaying a volcano background image).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this configuration, when the game medium is controlled from the special state to the normal state without passing through a specific area in a special state, the normal background image is displayed without displaying the special background image, thereby preventing the player from feeling more disappointed due to the special background image.

The gaming machine according to the means 09-6 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means 09-1 to 09-5,
The decorative identification information includes characters (the decorative pattern is composed of a number pattern and a character),
The display control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the specific display result is displayed on the display means in response to being controlled to the advantageous state while being controlled to the normal state, an animation of the character taking an action can be displayed together with the specific display result (when a combination of decorative symbols for a jackpot is stopped and displayed in response to being controlled to a jackpot game state in the normal state, a symbol stop action presentation in which a character takes an action is executed);
When the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the special state while being controlled to the special state, the animation is not displayed when the specific display result is displayed on the display means in the normal state after the special state (when the game medium is controlled to the normal state without winning a V during a small win game and a combination for a big win of decorative patterns is displayed, a pattern stop action performance in which a character takes an action is not executed).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, when the game medium is controlled from the special state to the normal state without passing through a specific area in the special state, no animation is displayed, thereby preventing the player from feeling more disappointed due to the animation.

The gaming machine according to the means 09-7 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means 09-1 to 09-6,
A sound output means (a performance control CPU 120 for controlling the speakers 8L and 8R) is provided.
The sound output means is capable of outputting a specific sound when the specific display result is displayed on the display means in response to being controlled to the advantageous state while being controlled to the normal state (executing a symbol stop sound effect for playing and outputting a symbol stop sound effect when a combination for a jackpot of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed in response to being controlled to the jackpot game state in the normal state);
When the game medium is controlled to the special state from the special state to the normal state without passing through the specific area in the special state, the specific sound is not output when the specific display result is displayed on the display means (when the game medium is controlled to the normal state without winning a V during a small win game and a combination for a big win of decorative patterns is displayed, a pattern stop sound effect is not executed).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this configuration, when the game medium is controlled from the special state to the normal state without passing through the specific area in the special state, the specific sound is not output, thereby preventing the player from feeling more disappointed due to the specific sound.

The gaming machine according to the means 09-8 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means 09-1 to 09-7,
The display control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the variable display is executed and the special state is controlled to the normal state without being controlled to the special state, game value information regarding the game value granted to the player can be displayed on the display means (when the time-saving state is controlled to the normal state without being controlled to the small win game state until the final variation in the time-saving state, a result display is displayed on the image display device 5).
When the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the special state in the case where the game is controlled to the special state, the game value information can be displayed on the display means in response to the end of the special state (when the game is controlled to the normal state without winning a V during the small win game state, a result display is displayed on the image display device 5 during the small win ending period of the small win game state),
When a power interruption occurs in the special state while the device is controlled to the special state, and the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the special state controlled after the power interruption is restored, the game value information is not displayed on the display means (when a power interruption occurs during a small win game state, and the device is controlled to the normal state without winning a V during the small win game state after the power is turned on, the result display is not displayed).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this configuration, after a power outage is restored, when it is difficult to grasp accurate game value information, the processing load on the display control means can be reduced by preventing the game value information from being displayed.

The gaming machine according to the means 09-9,
A gaming machine according to any one of means 09-1 to 09-8,
The display control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the variable display is executed and the special state is controlled to the normal state without being controlled to the special state, game value information regarding the game value granted to the player can be displayed on the display means for a first period (when the time-saving state is controlled to the normal state without being controlled to the small win game state until the final change in the time-saving state, a result display is displayed for 10 seconds (a pattern determination period));
When the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the special state in the case where the game is controlled to the special state, the game value information can be displayed on the display means for a second period shorter than the first period in response to the end of the special state (when the game is controlled to the normal state without a V winning during a small win game, the result display is displayed for 3 seconds (small win ending period)).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, even when the gaming medium does not pass through a specific area in a special state, the player's attention can be directed to the gaming value information, thereby reducing the player's sense of disappointment.

The gaming machine according to the means 09-10,
A gaming machine according to any one of means 09-1 to 09-7,
The display control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the variable display is executed and the special state is controlled to the normal state without being controlled to the special state, game value information regarding the game value granted to the player can be displayed on the display means (when the time-saving state is controlled to the normal state without being controlled to the small win game state until the final change in the time-saving state, a result display is displayed).
When the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the special state in the case where the game is controlled to the special state, the game value information is not displayed on the display means (when the game is controlled to the normal state without a V winning during a small win game, the result display is not displayed).
A gaming machine characterized by:
With this configuration, the player does not need to be made aware of game value information relating to a game value that is less than the game value that is to be awarded when the game medium passes through a specific area, thereby preventing a decline in interest.

The gaming machine according to the means 09-11,
A gaming machine according to any one of means 09-1 to 09-10,
A command transmission means (CPU 103) is provided for transmitting commands related to games,
The state control means (CPU 103) is capable of controlling from the special state to the normal state when a predetermined number of variable displays are executed without being controlled to the advantageous state based on the variable display executed in the special state (when seven variable displays are executed without the occurrence of either a "jackpot" or a "jackpot via a small jackpot" in the [rush mode] of the time-saving state, the state control means (CPU 103) is capable of controlling from the special state to the normal state);
The display control means (performance control CPU 120) is capable of displaying on the display means game value information regarding the game value granted to the player when a special end command corresponding to the end of the predetermined number of variable displays in the special state is received (displaying a result display based on the reception of a symbol determination B designation command).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, when the special state is changed to the normal state, the gaming value information can be displayed at an appropriate timing.

The gaming machine according to the means 09-12 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means 09-1 to 09-10,
A reserved storage means (CPU 103) for storing reserved information (reserved storage) relating to variable display that is not being executed;
A command transmission means (CPU 103) for transmitting a command related to a game,
The state control means (CPU 103) is capable of controlling from the special state to the normal state when a predetermined number of variable displays are executed without being controlled to the advantageous state based on the variable display executed in the special state (when seven variable displays are executed without the occurrence of either a "jackpot" or a "jackpot via a small jackpot" in the [rush mode] of the time-saving state, the state control means (CPU 103) is capable of controlling from the special state to the normal state);
The display control means (presentation control CPU 120) is controlled to the special state based on the predetermined number of variable displays, and if the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the special state, when a special state end command corresponding to the end of the special state is received, game value information regarding the game value granted to the player can be displayed on the display means (when the seventh variable display is executed in [rush mode] among the time-saving state, the display result becomes "small win", and if no V is won during the small win game, a result display is displayed based on the reception of a small win end designation command).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, when the special state ends in a case where the gaming medium does not pass through the specific area during the special state, the gaming value information can be displayed at an appropriate timing.

The gaming machine according to the means 09-13 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means 09-1 to 09-10,
A reserved storage means (CPU 103) for storing reserved information (reserved storage) relating to variable display that is not being executed;
A command transmission means (CPU 103) for transmitting a command related to a game,
The state control means (CPU 103) is capable of controlling from the special state to the normal state when a predetermined number of variable displays are executed without being controlled to the advantageous state based on the variable display executed in the special state (when seven variable displays are executed without the occurrence of either a "jackpot" or a "jackpot via a small jackpot" in the [rush mode] of the time-saving state, the state control means (CPU 103) is capable of controlling from the special state to the normal state);
The display control means (performance control CPU 120) is controlled to the special state based on the predetermined number of variable displays, and if the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the special state, when a command corresponding to the execution of the variable display is received, game value information regarding the game value granted to the player can be displayed on the display means (when the seventh variable display is executed in the [rush mode] of the time-saving state, the display result becomes a "small win", and if no V is won during the small win game, a result display is displayed based on the reception of a variable pattern designation command corresponding to the next variable display).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, when the next variable display is executed in the case where the gaming medium does not pass through the specific area in the special state, the gaming value information can be displayed at an appropriate timing.

The gaming machine according to the means 09-14,
A gaming machine according to any one of means 09-1 to 09-13,
The display control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the game device is controlled to the normal state, a specific display result can be displayed on the display means in response to being controlled to the advantageous state (when the game device is controlled to the normal state, a jackpot combination of decorative symbols is displayed on the image display device 5 in response to being controlled to the jackpot game state),
When the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the special state in the case where the game medium is controlled to the special state, the specific display result can be displayed on the display means in the normal state after the special state (when the game medium is controlled to the normal state without winning a V during a small win game, a combination for a big win of decorative symbols is displayed on the image display device 5),
When a power interruption occurs in the special state while the device is controlled to the special state, and the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the special state controlled after the power interruption is restored, a display result different from the specific display result can be displayed on the display means (when a power interruption occurs during a small win game, and the device is controlled to the normal state without winning a V during a small win game after the power is turned on, a special combination of decorative symbols (such as "135") different from the big win combination of decorative symbols is displayed on the image display device 5).
A gaming machine characterized by:
With this configuration, when a power outage occurs in a special state while the device is controlled to a special state, the player can clearly recognize that the gaming medium did not pass through the specific area in the special state controlled after the power outage is restored.

The gaming machine according to the means 09-15,
A gaming machine according to any one of means 09-1 to 09-14,
The display control means (performance control CPU 120)
The display means can display decoration identification information of the reach state (decorative symbol combination in the reach state (e.g., "2" and "2")),
When a power interruption occurs in the special state while the game medium is controlled to the special state, and when the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the special state controlled after the power interruption is restored, a combination of decorative identification information not including the reach mode can be displayed on the display means as a display result different from the specific display result (when a power interruption occurs during a small win game, and when the game medium is controlled to the normal state without winning a V during a small win game after the power is turned on, a special combination of decorative symbols not including a reach mode different from the big win combination of decorative symbols (such as "135") is displayed on the image display device 5).
A gaming machine characterized by:
With this configuration, when a power outage occurs in a special state while the device is controlled to a special state, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling disappointed when the game medium does not pass through a specific area in the special state controlled after the power outage is restored.

The gaming machine according to the means 09-16,
A gaming machine according to any one of means 09-1 to 09-15,
When the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the special state under control of the special state, the period from when the display result of the decoration identification information is displayed on the display means to when the demo performance is executed is longer than the period from when a power interruption occurs in the special state under control of the special state under control of the special state under control of the special state after the power interruption is restored and the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the special state under control of ...
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this configuration, the period from when the display result of the decoration identification information is displayed on the display means to when the demonstration performance is executed can be set to an appropriate period.

The gaming machine according to the means 09-17,
A gaming machine according to any one of means 09-1 to 09-16,
The display control means (performance control CPU 120)
When a power outage occurs, a restoration display (restoration display) that notifies the user that the power has been restored after the power outage can be displayed on the display means;
When the game is controlled to the special state, a power interruption occurs in the special state, and it is possible to end the recovery display before the end of the special state controlled after the power interruption is restored (when a power interruption occurs during a small win game, the recovery display is ended before the small win game ends after the power is turned on),
After the recovery display has ended but the special state has not ended, a normal background image and decoration identification information corresponding to the normal state can be displayed (a sunny background image and decoration pattern are displayed during a small win game after the power is turned on).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this configuration, after notification that power has been restored after a power outage, the normal background image and decorative identification information can be displayed before the special state ends, so that the player can understand that the situation requires the gaming medium to be fired toward a specific area.

The gaming machine according to the means 09-18,
A gaming machine according to any one of means 09-1 to 09-17,
A light emitting means (V winning determination device LED87L) provided in correspondence with the variable means;
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120) for controlling the light emission of the light emitting means;
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
When controlled to the special state, it is possible to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a first light emitting manner (executing a first promotion blinking effect in which the V winning determination device LED87L blinks (lights) in rainbow colors (7 colors) at a blinking cycle of 0.5 seconds during a small winning game state),
When the special state is controlled, a power interruption occurs in the special state, and in the special state controlled after the power interruption is restored, the light emitting means can be made to emit light in a second light emitting mode having a light emitting cycle different from that of the first light emitting mode (when a power interruption occurs during a small win game state, and during the small win game state after the power is turned on, a second promotional blinking effect is executed in which the V winning determination device LED87L blinks (lights) in red (one color) at a blinking cycle of 2 seconds).
A gaming machine characterized by:
With this configuration, when a power outage occurs in a special state while the device is being controlled to a special state, the player can be directed to the variable means in the special state controlled after the power outage is restored.

The gaming machine according to the means 09-19,
A gaming machine according to any one of the above means,
The first light emitting mode is a mode in which the light emitting means blinks in a first cycle (the blinking cycle of the first promotion blinking effect is 0.5 seconds),
The second light emitting mode is a mode in which the light emitting means blinks at a second cycle that is longer than the first cycle (the blinking cycle of the second promotion blinking effect is 2 seconds).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, by making the light-emitting means emit light in the first light-emitting mode, it is possible to increase the interest in the game, and by making the light-emitting means emit light in the second light-emitting mode, it is possible to make the player recognize the high degree of urgency.

The gaming machine according to the means 09-20,
A gaming machine according to means 09-18 or 09-19,
The first light-emitting mode is a mode in which the light-emitting means emits light in a plurality of light-emitting colors (the light-emitting color of the first promotion blinking effect is rainbow color (7 colors)),
The second light emitting mode is a mode in which the light emitting means emits light with fewer light colors than the first light emitting mode (the light emitting color of the first promotion flashing effect is red (one color)).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, by making the light-emitting means emit light in the first light-emitting mode, it is possible to increase the interest in the game, and by making the light-emitting means emit light in the second light-emitting mode, it is possible to make the player recognize the high degree of urgency.

The gaming machine according to the means 09-21,
A gaming machine according to any one of means 09-18 to 09-20,
Sound output means (speakers 8L and 8R) are provided.
When controlled to the special state, the light emitting means emits light in the first light emitting manner, a predetermined launch display encouraging the player to launch a game medium into a predetermined area is displayed on the display means, and a predetermined sound is output from the sound output means (during a small win game state, a first promotional flashing effect is executed in which the V winning determination device LED 87L flashes (lights) in rainbow colors (seven colors) at a flashing cycle of 0.5 seconds, a first promotional image effect is executed in which the image display device 5 displays a first promotional image including a first arrow image in the center of the screen instructing the player to hit to the right in order to win a V prize, and a promotional sound effect effect is executed in which a promotional sound effect is played and output from the speakers 8L and 8R).
When a power interruption occurs in the special state while the device is controlled to the special state, and in the special state controlled after the power interruption is restored, the light emitting means emits light in the second light emitting manner, the predetermined firing display is displayed on the display means, while the predetermined sound is not output from the sound output means (when a power interruption occurs during a small win game state, and during the small win game state after the power is turned on, a second promotional flashing effect is executed in which the V winning determination device LED87L flashes (lights) red (one color) at a flashing cycle of 2 seconds, and a second promotional image effect is executed in which the image display device 5 displays a second promotional image including a second arrow image in the center of the screen instructing the player to hit to the right to win a V, while no promotional sound effect effect is executed).
A gaming machine characterized by:
With this configuration, if a power outage occurs in a special state, the player can understand that the situation requires the gaming medium to be fired toward a specific area even if the sound output means is not activated in the controlled special state after the power outage is restored.

The gaming machine according to the means 09-22,
A gaming machine according to any one of means 09-18 to 09-21,
The display control means (the performance control CPU 120) is capable of displaying on the display means a predetermined launch display (a first promotion image including a first arrow image, and a second promotion image including a second arrow image) that prompts the player to launch the game medium into a predetermined area when the display control means is controlled to be in the special state;
When controlled to the special state, the predetermined launch display can be displayed in a first manner (during a small win game state, the display manner is a rainbow (seven-color) image, and a first arrow image, which is a moving image that performs an animation operation, is displayed),
When the game is controlled to the special state, a power interruption occurs in the special state, and in the special state controlled after the power interruption is restored, the predetermined launch display can be displayed in a second manner different from the first manner (when a power interruption occurs during a small win game state, and during the small win game state after the power is turned on, the display manner is a white (single color) image, and a second arrow image that is a still image that does not perform an animation operation is displayed).
A gaming machine characterized by:
With this configuration, if a power outage occurs in a special state, the specified launch display can be displayed in a second manner different from the first manner in the controlled special state after the power outage is restored, thereby making the player aware of the high urgency of the situation.

The gaming machine according to the means 09-23,
The gaming machine according to the means 09-22,
The display control means (the performance control CPU 120) is capable of displaying on the display means a predetermined launch display (a first promotion image including a first arrow image, and a second promotion image including a second arrow image) that prompts the player to launch the game medium into a predetermined area when the display control means is controlled to be in the special state;
The predetermined firing display of the second aspect has a smaller operating range or fewer display colors than the predetermined firing display of the first aspect (the first arrow image is a moving image with many display colors, whereas the second arrow image is a still image with few display colors).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this configuration, by displaying the predetermined launch display in a first manner, it is possible to increase the enjoyment of the game, and by displaying the predetermined launch display in a second manner, it is possible to make the player aware of the high degree of urgency.

1 Pachinko game machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 103 CPU 120 Performance control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that executes variable display,
A variable means for controlling the game medium to enter into an enterable state;
a state control means for controlling an advantageous state advantageous to a player, a special state which is controlled after the advantageous state and in which a variable display is executed more frequently than in a normal state, and a special state which is controlled when a special condition is established in the special state and is a state different from the advantageous state , in which the variable means is controlled to the entry-enabling state;
The state control means includes:
The game medium that has entered the variable means can be controlled to the advantageous state after passing through a specific area,
After the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the special state, the game medium can be controlled to the normal state;
a display control means for displaying a display result of the variable display of the ornament identification information on the display means;
The display control means
A specific display result can be displayed on the display means as the display result in response to being controlled to the advantageous state when being controlled to the normal state,
When a power interruption occurs in the special state , and the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the special state controlled after the power interruption is restored, a special display result different from the specific display result can be displayed on the display means after the special state ends ,
When the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the special state, the specific display result can be displayed on the display means after the special state ends ;
When a power outage occurs and the power is restored, a restoration display can be displayed on the display means;
A power interruption occurs in the special state, and the recovery display can be terminated before the end of the special state that is controlled after the power interruption is restored,
In the normal state, any one of a plurality of types of normal background images can be displayed on the display means;
A common normal background image can be displayed on the display means in a normal state controlled after a variable display is executed in the special state without being controlled by the special state, and in the normal state controlled after the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the special state.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images